ZyXEL Communications P873HNUP51B 802.11n VDSL2 Bonded 4-port Wi-Fi Gateway User Manual P 873HNUP 51B

ZyXEL Communications Corporation 802.11n VDSL2 Bonded 4-port Wi-Fi Gateway P 873HNUP 51B

Users Manual

Download: ZyXEL Communications P873HNUP51B 802.11n VDSL2 Bonded 4-port Wi-Fi Gateway User Manual P 873HNUP 51B
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]ZyXEL Communications P873HNUP51B 802.11n VDSL2 Bonded 4-port Wi-Fi Gateway User Manual P 873HNUP 51B
Document ID1475702
Application IDzozW1DF/+NJT2DbWc58Hnw==
Document DescriptionUsers Manual
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize359.53kB (4494181 bits)
Date Submitted2011-06-01 00:00:00
Date Available2011-06-01 00:00:00
Creation Date2011-05-31 09:58:18
Producing SoftwareAcrobat Distiller 8.0.0 (Windows)
Document Lastmod2011-05-31 10:04:45
Document TitleP-873HNUP-51B_User Manual.pdf
Document CreatorFrameMaker 9.0
Document Author: cathyc

P-873HNUP-51B
802.11n Wireless VDSL2 4-port Gateway
Default Login Details
IP Address
http://192.168.1.1
User Name
admin
Password
1234
Firmware Version 1.10
Edition 1, 5/2011
www.zyxel.com
www.zyxel.com
Copyright © 2011
ZyXEL Communications Corporation
About This User's Guide
About This User's Guide
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for people who want to configure the ZyXEL Device using the web
configurator.
Related Documentation
• Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. It contains
information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access.
• Support Disc
Refer to the included CD for support documents.
Document Conventions
Warnings and Notes
These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User’s Guide.
Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device.
Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may
need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations.
Syntax Conventions
• The P-873HNUP-51B may be referred to as the “ZyXEL Device”, the “device”, the “system” or the
“product” in this User’s Guide.
• Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font.
• A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example, [ENTER] means the
“enter” or “return” key on your keyboard.
• “Enter” means for you to type one or more characters and then press the [ENTER] key. “Select”
or “choose” means for you to use one of the predefined choices.
• A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example,
Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel,
then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen.
• Units of measurement may denote the “metric” value or the “scientific” value. For example, “k”
for kilo may denote “1000” or “1024”, “M” for mega may denote “1000000” or “1048576” and so
on.
• “e.g.,” is a shorthand for “for instance”, and “i.e.,” means “that is” or “in other words”.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Document Conventions
Icons Used in Figures
Figures in this User’s Guide may use the following generic icons. The ZyXEL Device icon is not an
exact representation of your device.
ZyXEL Device
Computer
Notebook computer
Server
Firewall
Telephone
Router
Switch
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Safety Warnings
Safety Warnings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
Do NOT store things on the device.
Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock
from lightning.
Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage
points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please
contact your vendor for further information.
Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device.
Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or
230V AC in Europe).
Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can
walk on the power adaptor or cord.
Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.
If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source.
Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of
electric shock from lightning.
Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.
Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord.
Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included
antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s).
This product is for indoor use only (utilisation intérieure exclusivement).
Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste
Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be
mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Safety Warnings
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Contents Overview
Contents Overview
User’s Guide ........................................................................................................................... 19
Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B ...............................................................................................21
The Web Configurator ................................................................................................................29
Quick Start ..................................................................................................................................37
Tutorials .....................................................................................................................................39
Technical Reference .............................................................................................................. 63
Network Map and Status Screens ..............................................................................................65
Broadband ..................................................................................................................................71
Wireless .....................................................................................................................................87
Home Networking ..................................................................................................................... 115
Static Routing ...........................................................................................................................135
Quality of Service (QoS) ..........................................................................................................139
Network Address Translation (NAT) .........................................................................................159
Dynamic DNS Setup ................................................................................................................175
IGMP ........................................................................................................................................179
Interface Group ........................................................................................................................189
Firewall .....................................................................................................................................195
MAC Filter ................................................................................................................................203
Parental Control .......................................................................................................................205
Scheduler Rules .......................................................................................................................209
Certificates ............................................................................................................................... 211
Service Control .........................................................................................................................223
ARP Table ................................................................................................................................225
Logs ........................................................................................................................................227
Traffic Status ...........................................................................................................................231
IGMP Status ............................................................................................................................235
.................................................................................................................................................236
xDSL Statistics .........................................................................................................................237
Users Configuration .................................................................................................................241
Remote Management ...............................................................................................................245
Time Settings ...........................................................................................................................251
Logs Setting ............................................................................................................................253
Firmware Upgrade ...................................................................................................................257
Configuration ............................................................................................................................259
Diagnostic ................................................................................................................................262
Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................267
Product Specifications ..............................................................................................................273
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Contents Overview
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
About This User's Guide .......................................................................................................... 3
Document Conventions ........................................................................................................... 3
Safety Warnings........................................................................................................................ 5
Contents Overview .................................................................................................................. 7
Table of Contents ..................................................................................................................... 9
Part I: User’s Guide ................................................................................19
Chapter 1
Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B ........................................................................................... 21
1.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................21
1.2 Ways to Manage the ZyXEL Device ....................................................................................21
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the ZyXEL Device .....................................................................22
1.4 Applications for the ZyXEL Device ......................................................................................22
1.4.1 Internet Access ...........................................................................................................22
1.4.2 HomePNA ...................................................................................................................23
1.5 LEDs (Lights) .......................................................................................................................25
1.6 The RESET Button ...............................................................................................................26
1.7 Wireless Access ...................................................................................................................27
1.7.1 Using the WLAN/WPS Button ....................................................................................27
Chapter 2
The Web Configurator ............................................................................................................ 29
2.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................29
2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator ................................................................................29
2.2 Web Configurator Layout .....................................................................................................32
2.2.1 Title Bar ......................................................................................................................32
2.2.2 Main Window ..............................................................................................................33
2.2.3 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................33
Chapter 3
Quick Start............................................................................................................................... 37
3.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................37
3.2 Quick Start Setup .................................................................................................................37
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Chapter 4
Tutorials ................................................................................................................................... 39
4.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................39
4.2 Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection .............................................................................39
4.3 HomePNA Example Setup ...................................................................................................42
4.4 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network ................................................................................44
4.4.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings ................................................................44
4.4.2 Using WPS .................................................................................................................46
4.4.3 Without WPS ..............................................................................................................49
4.5 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups ...................................................................................50
4.6 Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding ..........................................................................................53
4.7 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network ....................................................55
4.8 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup ...........................................................................57
4.9 Access the ZyXEL Device Using DDNS ..............................................................................60
4.9.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org .....................................................61
4.9.2 Configuring DDNS on Your ZyXEL Device .................................................................61
4.9.3 Testing the DDNS Setting ...........................................................................................61
Part II: Technical Reference...................................................................63
Chapter 5
Network Map and Status Screens ......................................................................................... 65
5.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................65
5.2 The Network Map Screen ....................................................................................................65
5.3 The Status Screen ................................................................................................................67
Chapter 6
Broadband............................................................................................................................... 71
6.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................71
6.1.1 What You Need to Know .............................................................................................71
6.1.2 Before You Begin ........................................................................................................72
6.2 The Broadband Screen ........................................................................................................73
6.2.1 Add/Edit Broadband ...................................................................................................74
6.3 The DSL Screen ...................................................................................................................80
6.4 Technical Reference .............................................................................................................82
6.4.1 Encapsulation .............................................................................................................82
6.4.2 Multiplexing .................................................................................................................83
6.4.3 VPI and VCI ................................................................................................................83
6.4.4 IP Address Assignment ..............................................................................................83
6.4.5 NAT .............................................................................................................................84
6.4.6 Traffic Shaping ............................................................................................................84
10
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Table of Contents
6.4.7 ATM Traffic Classes ....................................................................................................84
6.4.8 Introduction to VLANs ................................................................................................85
Chapter 7
Wireless ................................................................................................................................... 87
7.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................87
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...............................................................................87
7.1.2 What You Need to Know .............................................................................................88
7.2 The General Screen ............................................................................................................88
7.2.1 No Security .................................................................................................................90
7.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) .............................................................................................91
7.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) .......................................................................................93
7.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication ................................................................................................94
7.3 The More AP Screen ............................................................................................................95
7.3.1 Edit More AP .............................................................................................................96
7.4 MAC Authentication .............................................................................................................97
7.5 The WPS Screen .................................................................................................................98
7.6 The Others Screen .............................................................................................................100
7.7 Technical Reference ...........................................................................................................101
7.7.1 Wireless Network Overview ......................................................................................101
7.7.2 Additional Wireless Terms ........................................................................................103
7.7.3 Wireless Security Overview ......................................................................................103
7.7.4 Signal Problems .......................................................................................................105
7.7.5 BSS ..........................................................................................................................106
7.7.6 MBSSID ....................................................................................................................106
7.7.7 Preamble Type .........................................................................................................107
7.7.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) ....................................................................................107
Chapter 8
Home Networking ................................................................................................................. 115
8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 115
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................. 115
8.1.2 What You Need To Know .......................................................................................... 116
8.1.3 Before You Begin ...................................................................................................... 117
8.2 The LAN Setup Screen ...................................................................................................... 117
8.3 The Static DHCP Screen .................................................................................................... 119
8.4 The UPnP Screen ..............................................................................................................121
8.5 Installing UPnP in Windows Example ................................................................................121
8.6 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ...............................................................................124
8.7 The STB Vendor ID Screen ................................................................................................129
8.8 The HPNA Screen ..............................................................................................................130
8.9 The 5th Ethernet Port Screen ............................................................................................130
8.10 The LAN VLAN Screen ....................................................................................................131
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
11
Table of Contents
8.11 Technical Reference .........................................................................................................132
8.11.1 LANs, WANs and the ZyXEL Device ......................................................................132
8.11.2 DHCP Setup ...........................................................................................................132
8.11.3 DNS Server Addresses ...........................................................................................133
8.11.4 LAN TCP/IP ............................................................................................................133
Chapter 9
Static Routing........................................................................................................................ 135
9.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................135
9.2 The Routing Screen ...........................................................................................................136
9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route ...............................................................................................137
Chapter 10
Quality of Service (QoS)....................................................................................................... 139
10.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................139
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................139
10.2 What You Need to Know ..................................................................................................140
10.3 The Quality of Service General Screen ...........................................................................141
10.4 The Queue Setup Screen ................................................................................................143
10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue ............................................................................................144
10.5 The Class Setup Screen .................................................................................................145
10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class ...............................................................................................147
10.6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen ........................................................................................150
10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer ..........................................................................................151
10.7 The QoS Monitor Screen ................................................................................................152
10.8 Technical Reference .........................................................................................................153
Chapter 11
Network Address Translation (NAT).................................................................................... 159
11.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................159
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................159
11.1.2 What You Need To Know ........................................................................................159
11.2 The Port Forwarding Screen ...........................................................................................160
11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding .......................................................................................162
11.3 The Applications Screen ..................................................................................................163
11.3.1 Add New Application ...............................................................................................164
11.4 The Port Triggering Screen ..............................................................................................164
11.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule ................................................................................166
11.5 The DMZ Screen ..............................................................................................................167
11.6 The ALG Screen ...............................................................................................................168
11.7 The Sessions Screen .......................................................................................................169
11.8 Technical Reference .........................................................................................................169
11.8.1 NAT Definitions .......................................................................................................169
12
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Table of Contents
11.8.2 What NAT Does ......................................................................................................170
11.8.3 How NAT Works ......................................................................................................171
11.8.4 NAT Application ......................................................................................................172
Chapter 12
Dynamic DNS Setup ............................................................................................................. 175
12.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................175
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................176
12.1.2 What You Need To Know ........................................................................................176
12.2 The DNS Entry Screen .....................................................................................................176
12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry ................................................................................................177
12.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen ...............................................................................................178
Chapter 13
IGMP....................................................................................................................................... 179
13.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................179
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................179
13.1.2 What You Need to Know .........................................................................................179
13.2 The IGMP General Screen ...............................................................................................181
13.3 IGMP Filter Configuration .................................................................................................182
13.3.1 IGMP Host Limitation Edit .......................................................................................184
13.3.2 IGMP Service Add ..................................................................................................184
13.3.3 IGMP Host Limitation Add ......................................................................................185
13.4 IGMP ACL Configuration ..................................................................................................186
13.4.1 IGMP ACL Add .......................................................................................................187
Chapter 14
Interface Group ..................................................................................................................... 189
14.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................189
14.2 The Interface Group Screen .............................................................................................189
14.2.1 Interface Group Configuration ................................................................................190
14.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria ....................................................................................192
Chapter 15
Firewall .................................................................................................................................. 195
15.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................195
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................195
15.1.2 What You Need to Know .........................................................................................195
15.2 The Firewall Screen .........................................................................................................197
15.3 The Protocol Screen .......................................................................................................197
15.3.1 Add a Protocol ......................................................................................................199
15.4 The Access Control Screen .............................................................................................200
15.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule ...........................................................................................201
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
13
Table of Contents
Chapter 16
MAC Filter.............................................................................................................................. 203
16.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................203
16.2 The MAC Filter Screen .....................................................................................................203
Chapter 17
Parental Control .................................................................................................................... 205
17.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................205
17.2 The Parental Control Screen ............................................................................................205
17.2.1 Add/Edit Parental Control Rule ...............................................................................206
Chapter 18
Scheduler Rules.................................................................................................................... 209
18.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................209
18.2 The Scheduler Rules Screen ...........................................................................................209
18.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule ...............................................................................................210
Chapter 19
Certificates ............................................................................................................................ 211
19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 211
19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................... 211
19.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 211
19.3 The Local Certificates Screen ..........................................................................................212
19.3.1 Create Certificate Request ....................................................................................213
19.3.2 Load Signed Certificate .........................................................................................214
19.3.3 Import Certificate ...................................................................................................215
19.3.4 Certificate Details ..................................................................................................217
19.4 The Trusted CA Screen ...................................................................................................219
19.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate ....................................................................................220
19.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate .................................................................................221
Chapter 20
Service Control ..................................................................................................................... 223
20.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................223
20.2 The Service Control Screen .............................................................................................223
Chapter 21
ARP Table .............................................................................................................................. 225
21.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................225
21.1.1 How ARP Works .....................................................................................................225
21.2 ARP Table Screen ............................................................................................................225
14
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Chapter 22
Logs ...................................................................................................................................... 227
22.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................227
22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................227
22.1.2 What You Need To Know ........................................................................................227
22.2 The System Log Screen ...................................................................................................228
22.3 The Security Log Screen ..................................................................................................229
Chapter 23
Traffic Status ........................................................................................................................ 231
23.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................231
23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................231
23.2 The WAN Status Screen ..................................................................................................231
23.3 The LAN Status Screen ....................................................................................................233
23.4 The HPNA Status Screen .................................................................................................234
Chapter 24
IGMP Status .......................................................................................................................... 235
24.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................235
24.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................235
24.2 The IGMP Group Screen .................................................................................................235
24.3 IGMP Statistics Screen ....................................................................................................236
................................................................................................................................................ 236
Chapter 25
xDSL Statistics...................................................................................................................... 237
25.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen ..............................................................................................237
Chapter 26
Users Configuration ............................................................................................................. 241
26.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................241
26.2 The Users Configuration Screen ......................................................................................241
26.2.1 Add/Edit a Users Account .......................................................................................242
Chapter 27
Remote Management............................................................................................................ 245
27.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................245
27.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................245
27.2 The TR-069 Clients Screen ..............................................................................................245
27.3 The TR-064 Screen ..........................................................................................................247
27.4 The SNMP Agent Screen .................................................................................................247
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
15
Table of Contents
Chapter 28
Time Settings ........................................................................................................................ 251
28.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................251
28.2 The Time Setting Screen ................................................................................................251
Chapter 29
Logs Setting ......................................................................................................................... 253
29.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................253
29.2 The Logs Setting Screen ..................................................................................................253
29.2.1 Example E-mail Log ...............................................................................................255
Chapter 30
Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................ 257
30.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................257
30.2 The Firmware Screen .......................................................................................................257
Chapter 31
Configuration ........................................................................................................................ 259
31.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................259
31.2 The Configuration Screen ................................................................................................259
31.3 The Reboot Screen ..........................................................................................................261
Chapter 32
Diagnostic ............................................................................................................................. 262
32.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................262
32.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ...........................................................................262
32.2 What You Need to Know ..................................................................................................262
32.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup ......................................................................................263
32.4 802.1ag ............................................................................................................................264
32.5 OAM Ping Test .................................................................................................................265
Chapter 33
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................... 267
33.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs .......................................................................267
33.2 ZyXEL Device Access and Login .....................................................................................268
33.3 Internet Access ................................................................................................................269
33.4 Wireless Internet Access ..................................................................................................271
Chapter 34
Product Specifications ......................................................................................................... 273
34.1 Hardware Specifications ...................................................................................................273
34.2 Firmware Specifications ...................................................................................................274
16
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address ........................................................... 279
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting........................................................................... 301
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions ....................................... 309
Appendix D Wireless LANs.................................................................................................. 319
Appendix E Services............................................................................................................ 333
Appendix F Open Software Announcements....................................................................... 337
Appendix G Legal Information ............................................................................................. 347
Index ...................................................................................................................................... 351
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
17
Table of Contents
18
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
P ART I
User’s Guide
19
20
C HAPT ER
Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B
1.1 Overview
The P-873HNUP-51B is a wireless VDSL router and Gigabit Ethernet gateway with Home Phoneline
Networking Alliance (HPNA) capability. It has two DSL ports and a Gigabit Ethernet port for superfast Internet access over analog (POTS) telephone lines. If the DSLAM of the ISP supports bonding
function, the two DSL ports on the P-873HNUP-51B can be connected to two separate telephone
jacks to provide increased throughput at longer distances. The ZyXEL Device supports both Packet
Transfer Mode (PTM) and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). It is backward compatible with ADSL,
ADSL2 and ADSL2+ in case VDSL is not available. The P-873HNUP-51B also provides IEEE
802.11b/g/n wireless networking to extend the range of your existing wired network without
additional wiring.
Please refer to the following description of the product name format.
• “H” denotes an integrated 4-port switch (hub).
• “N” denotes 802.11n draft 2.0. The “N” models support 802.11n wireless connection mode.
• “U” denotes a USB port. The ZyXEL Device supports a flash disk (FAT16/FAT32 format), which
FTP clients can access.
• “P” denotes a device that has Home Phoneline Networking Alliance (HPNA) capability.
• Model names ending in “1”, for example P-873HNUP-51, denote a device that works over the
analog telephone system, POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service). The DSL RJ-14 connects to your
ADSL-enabled telephone lines.
Only use firmware for your ZyXEL Device’s specific model. Refer to the
label on the bottom of your ZyXEL Device.
See Chapter 34 on page 273 for a full list of features.
1.2 Ways to Manage the ZyXEL Device
Use any of the following methods to manage the ZyXEL Device.
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the ZyXEL Device using a
(supported) web browser.
• TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your device.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
21
Chapter 1 Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the ZyXEL Device
Do the following things regularly to make the ZyXEL Device more secure and to manage the ZyXEL
Device more effectively.
• Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different
types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier
working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you
forget your password, you will have to reset the ZyXEL Device to its factory default settings. If
you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the ZyXEL
Device. You could simply restore your last configuration.
1.4 Applications for the ZyXEL Device
Here are some example uses for which the ZyXEL Device is well suited.
1.4.1 Internet Access
Your ZyXEL Device provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or
MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. You can have up to eight WAN services over one
ADSL, VDSL or Ethernet WAN line. The ZyXEL Device cannot work in ADSL, VDSL and Ethernet
WAN mode at the same time.
Note: The ADSL, VDSL and Ethernet WAN lines share the same eight WAN (layer-3)
interfaces that you configure in the ZyXEL Device. Refer to Section 6.2 on page 73
for the Network Settings> Broadband screen.
22
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B
Computers can connect to the ZyXEL Device’s LAN ports (or wirelessly).
Figure 1 ZyXEL Device’s Internet Access Application
WLAN
WAN
Bridging
IPoE
PPPoE
ADSL / VDSL
LAN
WLAN
WAN
IPoA / PPPoA
LAN
ADSL
WLAN
WAN
Bridging
IPoE
PPPoE
LAN
Ethernet
DSL
You can also configure IP filtering on the ZyXEL Device for secure Internet access. When the IP filter
is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked by default unless it is
initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not
allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files.
1.4.2 HomePNA
The ZyXEL Device complies with HomePNA (Home Phoneline Networking Alliance, also known as
HPNA) 3.1, a home networking technology for carrying data over existing coaxial cables and
telephone wiring.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
23
Chapter 1 Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B
The figure below shows your ZyXEL Device (A) connecting to a phone line outlet for DSL Internet
access and a coaxial outlet to relay Internet connectivity to other coaxial outlets in the building. The
laptop (B) connects wirelessly to the ZyXEL Device. The set-up box (C) connects into a coaxial
outlet in another part of the house for access to online videos.
Figure 2 HomePNA Application
24
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B
1.5 LEDs (Lights)
The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs.
Figure 3 LEDs on the Device
None of the LEDs are on if the ZyXEL Device is not receiving power.
Table 1 LED Descriptions
LED
COLOR
STATUS
DESCRIPTION
POWER
Green
On
The ZyXEL Device is receiving power and ready for use.
Blinking
The ZyXEL Device is self-testing.
On
The ZyXEL Device detected an error while self-testing, or there
is a device malfunction.
Off
The ZyXEL Device is not receiving power.
Blinking
Firmware upgrade is in progress.
On
The ZyXEL Device has a successful 100 Mbps Ethernet
connection with a device on the Local Area Network (LAN).
Blinking
The ZyXEL Device is sending or receiving data to/from the LAN
at 100 Mbps.
Off
The ZyXEL Device does not have an Ethernet connection with
the LAN.
Red
ETHERNET
1-4
Green
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
25
Chapter 1 Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B
Table 1 LED Descriptions (continued)
LED
COLOR
STATUS
ETHERNET
WAN
Green
On
The Gigabit Ethernet connection is working.
Blinking
The ZyXEL Device is sending or receiving data to/from the
Gigabit Ethernet link.
USB
Green
DSL1,2
Green
Orange
INTERNET
Green
DESCRIPTION
Off
There is no Gigabit Ethernet link.
On
The ZyXEL Device recognizes a USB connection.
Blinking
The ZyXEL Device is sending/receiving data to /from the USB
device connected to it.
Off
The ZyXEL Device does not detect a USB connection.
On
The ADSL line is up.
Blinking
The ZyXEL Device is initializing the ADSL line.
Off
The ADSL line is down.
On
The VDSL line is up.
Blinking
The ZyXEL Device is initializing the VDSL line.
Off
The VDSL line is down.
On
The ZyXEL Device has an IP connection but no traffic.
Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by
a DHCP server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if
used) and the DSL connection is up.
HPNA
WLAN/WPS
Green
Green
Green
and
Orange
Blinking
The ZyXEL Device is sending or receiving IP traffic.
Off
There is no Internet connection or the gateway is in bridged
mode.
On
The ZyXEL Device is connected to an HPNA-equipped device
through the coaxial cable.
Blinking
Data is transmitting over the HPNA cable.
Off
No HPNA device is connected.
On
The wireless network is activated.
Blinking
The ZyXEL Device is communicating with other wireless clients.
Blinking
The ZyXEL Device is setting up a WPS connection.
Off
The wireless network is not activated.
1.6 The RESET Button
If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET
button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you
will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to “1234”.
26
Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking).
To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for ten seconds or
until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the POWER LED begins to blink,
the defaults have been restored and the device restarts.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B
1.7 Wireless Access
The ZyXEL Device is a wireless Access Point (AP) for wireless clients, such as notebook computers
or PDAs and iPads. It allows them to connect to the Internet without having to rely on inconvenient
Ethernet cables.
You can configure your wireless network in either the built-in Web Configurator, or using the WPS
button.
Figure 4 Wireless Access Example
1.7.1 Using the WLAN/WPS Button
If the wireless network is turned off, press the WLAN/WPS button on the front of the ZyXEL
Device for two seconds. Once the WLAN/WPS LED turns green, the wireless network is active.
You can also use the WLAN/WPS button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between
the ZyXEL Device and a WPS-compatible client by adding one device at a time.
To activate WPS:
Make sure the POWER LED is on and not blinking.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
27
Chapter 1 Introducing the P-873HNUP-51B
Press the WLAN/WPS button for five seconds and release it.
Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the ZyXEL Device. The
WLAN/WPS LED flashes green and orange while the ZyXEL Device sets up a WPS connection with
the other wireless device.
Once the connection is successfully made, the WLAN/WPS LED shines green.
To turn off the wireless network, press the WLAN/WPS button on the front of the ZyXEL Device for
one to five seconds. The WLAN/WPS LED turns off when the wireless network is off.
28
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
The Web Configurator
2.1 Overview
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy device setup and
management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later versions or Mozilla Firefox 3
and later versions or Safari 2.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by
768 pixels.
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in
Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
See Appendix C on page 309 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet
Explorer.
2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator
Make sure your ZyXEL Device hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide).
Launch your web browser. If the ZyXEL Device does not automatically re-direct you to the login
screen, go to http://192.168.1.1.
A password screen displays. To access the administrative web configurator and manage the ZyXEL
Device, type the default username admin and password 1234 in the password screen and click
Login. If advanced account security is enabled (see Section 26.2 on page 241) the number of dots
that appears when you type the password changes randomly to prevent anyone watching the
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
29
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
password field from knowing the length of your password. If you have changed the password, enter
your password and click Login. For security reasons, you will be temporarily denied access to the
ZyXEL Device for a period of time (15 minutes by default) if you have entered the incorrect
username and password for a certain number of times (three times by default).
Figure 5 Password Screen
A welcome screen appears showing a summary of your last login, such as the time, number of
failed login attempts, and when the password expires. It also shows if you are logged on from an IP
address. Select Show this page next time to see the welcome screen on your next login.
Otherwise, deselect it. Click Continue.
Figure 6 Welcome Screen
30
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
The Network Map page appears.
Figure 7 Network Map
Note: For security reasons, the ZyXEL Device automatically logs you out if you do not use
the web configurator for ten minutes (default). If this happens, log in again.
Click Status to display the Status screen, where you can view the ZyXEL Device’s interface and
system information.
Note: It is strongly recommended you change the default password. You can do so in the
Maintenance > Users Configuration screen. See Chapter 26 on page 241 for
more information.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
31
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
2.2 Web Configurator Layout
Figure 8 Screen Layout
As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:
• A - title bar
• B - main window
• C - navigation panel
2.2.1 Title Bar
The title bar provides some icons in the upper right corner.
32
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
The icons provide the following functions.
Table 2 Web Configurator Icons in the Title Bar
ICON
DESCRIPTION
Quick Start: Click this icon to open screens where you can configure the ZyXEL
Device’s time zone Internet access, and wireless settings.
Logout: Click this icon to log out of the web configurator.
2.2.2 Main Window
The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this
document.
After you click Status on the Network Map page, the Status screen is displayed. See Chapter 5
on page 67 for more information about the Status screen.
If you click Virtual Device on the Status screen, a visual graphic appears, showing the connection
status of the ZyXEL Device’s ports. The connected ports are in color and disconnected ports are
gray.
If you click Network Map on the Status screen, the Network Map screen appears. See Chapter 5
on page 65 for more information about the Network Map screen.
2.2.3 Navigation Panel
Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure ZyXEL Device features.
The following tables describe each menu item.
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary
LINK
TAB
Network Map
FUNCTION
This screen shows the network status of the ZyXEL Device and computers/
devices connected to it.
Network Settings
Broadband
Wireless
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Broadband
Use this screen to enable PTM over ADSL, view and configure ISP
parameters, WAN IP address assignment, and other advanced properties.
You can also add new WAN connections.
DSL
Use this screen to enable and configure the DSL bonding function.
General
Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN
authentication/security settings.
More AP
Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the ZyXEL Device.
MAC
Authentication
Use this screen to block or allow wireless traffic from wireless devices of
certain SSIDs and MAC addresses to the ZyXEL Device.
WPS
Use this screen to configure and view your WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
settings.
Others
Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings.
33
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued)
LINK
Home
Networking
Routing
QoS
NAT
DNS Setting
IGMP Setting
Interface
Group
TAB
FUNCTION
LAN Setup
Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, and other advanced
properties.
Static DHCP
Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC
addresses.
UPnP
Use this screen to turn UPnP and UPnP NAT-T on or off.
STB Vendor ID
Use this screen to have the ZyXEL Device automatically create static
DHCP entries for Set Top Box (STB) devices when they request IP
addresses.
HPNA
Use this screen to enable or disable the HPNA port.
5th Ethernet
Port
Use this screen to configure the Ethernet WAN port as a LAN port.
LAN VLAN
Use this screen to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags of
traffic sent out through individual LAN ports.
Static Route
Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the ZyXEL Device.
Policy
Forwarding
Use this screen to configure policy routing on the ZyXEL Device.
General
Use this screen to enable QoS and traffic prioritizing. You can also
configure the QoS rules and actions.
Queue Setup
Use this screen to configure QoS queues.
Class Setup
Use this screen to define a classifier.
Policer Setup
Use these screens to configure QoS policers.
Monitor
Use this screen to view QoS packets statistics.
Port Forwarding
Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world.
Applications
Use this screen to configure servers behind the ZyXEL Device.
Port Triggering
Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s port triggering settings.
DMZ
Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets from
ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen.
ALG
Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG.
Sessions
Use this screen to limit the number of NAT sessions a single client can
establish.
DNS Entry
Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes.
Dynamic DNS
Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address.
General
Use this screen to configure general IGMP proxy and IGMP packet
processing settings.
IGMP Filter
Use this screen to control IGMP access.
IGMP ACL
Use this screen to block or allow access to specific multicast media
channels.
Interface Group
Use this screen to map a port to a PVC or bridge group.
General
Use this screen to configure the security level of your firewall.
Protocol
Use this screen to add or remove predefined Internet services and
configure firewall rules.
Access Control
Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services.
MAC Filter
Use this screen to block or allow traffic from devices of certain MAC
addresses to the ZyXEL Device.
Security Settings
Firewall
MAC Filter
34
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued)
LINK
TAB
FUNCTION
Parental
Control
Parental Control
Use this screen to block web sites with the specific URL.
Scheduler Rule
Scheduler Rule
Use this screen to configure the days and times when a configured
restriction (such as parental control) is enforced.
Certificates
Local Certificates
Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage
certificates and certification requests.
Trusted CA
Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs.
Service Control
Use this screen to control service access to the ZyXEL Device.
ARP Table
ARP Table
Use this screen to view the ARP table. It displays the IP and MAC address
of each DHCP connection.
Log
System Log
Use this screen to view the status of events that occurred to the ZyXEL
Device. You can export or e-mail the logs.
Security Log
Use this screen to view the login record of the ZyXEL Device. You can
export or e-mail the logs.
WAN
Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the
WAN port of the ZyXEL Device.
LAN
Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the
LAN ports of the ZyXEL Device.
HPNA
Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the
HPNA port of the ZyXEL Device.
IGMP Group
Use this screen to view the status of all IGMP settings on the ZyXEL
Device.
IGMP Statistics
Use this screen to view the ZyXEL Device’s IGMP multicast group and
IGMP traffic statistics.
xDSL Statistics
Use this screen to view the ZyXEL Device’s xDSL traffic statistics.
Users
Configuration
Users
Configuration
Use this screen to add and configure user accounts on the ZyXEL Device.
Remote MGMT
TR-069 Client
Use this screen to configure the ZyXEL Device to be managed by an Auto
Configuration Server (ACS).
TR-064 Client
Use this screen to enable management via TR-064 on the LAN.
SNMP Agent
Use this screen to configure your ZyXEL Device’s settings for Simple
Network Management Protocol management.
Time Setting
Time Setting
Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s time and date.
Log Setting
Log Setting
Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s log settings.
Firmware
Upgrade
Firmware
Upgrade
Use this screen to upload firmware to your device.
Configuration
Configuration
Use this screen to backup and restore your device’s configuration
(settings) or reset the factory default settings.
Reboot
Reboot
Use this screen to reboot the ZyXEL Device without turning the power off.
Service Control
System Monitor
Traffic Status
IGMP Group
Status
xDSL Statistics
Maintenance
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
35
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued)
LINK
Diagnostic
36
TAB
FUNCTION
Ping &
TraceRoute &
NsLookup
Use this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection. You can use
Ping, TraceRoute, or Nslookup to help you identify problems.
802.1ag
Use this screen to configure CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) MD
(maintenance domain) and MA (maintenance association), perform
connectivity tests and view test reports.
OAM Ping
These screen displays information to help you identify problems with the
DSL connection.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Quick Start
3.1 Overview
Use the Quick Start screens to configure the ZyXEL Device’s time zone and basic Internet access
and wireless settings.
Note: See the technical reference chapters (starting on page 63) for background
information on the features in this chapter.
3.2 Quick Start Setup
Click the Click Start icon in the top right corner of the web configurator to open the quick start
screens. Select the time zone of the ZyXEL Device’s location and click Next.
Figure 9 Time Zone
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
37
Chapter 3 Quick Start
Enter your PPPoE account’s user name and password exactly as provided by your Internet Service
Provider (ISP). If your ISP also gave you static IP address settings to use, select Yes and enter
them in the fields that display. Click Next.
Figure 10 Internet Connection
Turn the wireless LAN on or off. If you keep it on, record the security settings so you can configure
your wireless clients to connect to the ZyXEL Device. Click Save.
Figure 11 Internet Connection
38
Your ZyXEL Device saves your settings and attempts to connect to the Internet.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Tutorials
4.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to use the ZyXEL Device’s various features.
• Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection, see page 39
• HomePNA Example Setup, see page 42
• Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network, see page 44
• Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups, see page 50
• Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding, see page 53
• Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network, see page 55
• Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup, see page 57
• Access the ZyXEL Device Using DDNS, see page 60
4.2 Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection
This tutorial shows you how to set up your Internet connection using the Web Configurator.
If you connect to the Internet through an ADSL connection, use the information from your Internet
Service Provider (ISP) to configure the ZyXEL Device. Be sure to contact your service provider for
any information you need to configure the Broadband screens.
Click Network Settings > Broadband to open the following screen. Click Add New WAN
Interface.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
39
Chapter 4 Tutorials
In this example, the DSL connection has the following information.
General
Connection Name
MyDSLConnection
Type
ADSL over ATM
Connection Mode
Routing
Encapsulation
PPPoE
ATM PVC Configuration
VPI/VCI
36/48
Encapsulation Mode
LLC/SNAP-Bridging
Service Category
UBR without PCR
Account Information
PPP User Name
1234@DSL-Ex.com
PPP Password
ABCDEF!
PPPoE Service Name
MyDSL
Static IP Address
192.168.1.32
Others
PPPoE Passthrough: Disabled
NAT: Enabled
IGMP Multicast Proxy: Enabled
Apply as Default Gateway: Enabled
Select the Active check box. Enter the General and ATM PVC Configuration settings as provided
above.
Set the Type to ADSL over ATM.
Choose the Encapsulation specified by your DSL service provider. For this example, the service
provider requires a username and password to establish Internet connection. Therefore, select
PPPoE as the WAN encapsulation type.
40
Enter the account information provided to you by your DSL service provider.
Configure this rule as your default Internet connection by selecting the Apply as Default Gateway
check box. Then select DNS as Static and enter the DNS server addresses provided to you, such as
192.168.5.2 (DNS server1)/192.168.5.1 (DNS server2).
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Click Apply to save your settings.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
41
Chapter 4 Tutorials
You should see a summary of your new DSL connection setup in the Broadband screen as follows.
Try to connect to a website, such as zyxel.com to see if you have correctly set up your Internet
connection. Be sure to contact your service provider for any information you need to configure the
WAN screens.
4.3 HomePNA Example Setup
This tutorial shows you how you can use the ZyXEL Device’s HomePNA feature to connect a
television in another part of the house to the Internet through the coaxial port. You will need:
• a Set-Top Box (STB)
• HomePNA Ethernet Bridge
• a television; and
• an active Video On Demand (VOD)/Internet Protocol Television (IPTV) subscription
42
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
The figure below shows the hardware setup for this tutorial:
Log into the ZyXEL Device’s Web Configurator. Go to the Network Settings > HPNA screen.
Select Enable in the State field to enable your HPNA port.
Connect your ZyXEL Device to the Internet source. This could be either DSL or Ethernet.
Connect the ZyXEL Device’s coaxial port a coaxial outlet in your house. This relays Internet
connectivity to other coaxial outlets in other parts of the house.
In the room where your television is located, connect the HomePNA bridge to a coaxial outlet.
Using an Ethernet cable, connect the HomePNA bridge device to the STB. This grants Internet
access to the STB.
Refer to the user’s guide of your STB for information on how to connect it to your television, as well
as configure your account settings on it.
You should now be able to watch online videos in your television using your VOD or IPTV
subscription.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
43
Chapter 4 Tutorials
4.4 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network
Thomas wants to set up a wireless network so that he can use his notebook to access the Internet.
In this wireless network, the ZyXEL Device serves as an access point (AP), and the notebook is the
wireless client. The wireless client can access the Internet through the AP.
Thomas has to configure the wireless network settings on the ZyXEL Device. Then he can set up a
wireless network using WPS (Section 4.4.2 on page 46) or manual configuration (Section 4.4.3 on
page 49).
4.4.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings
This example uses the following parameters to set up a wireless network.
44
SSID
Example
Security Mode
WPA-PSK
Pre-Shared Key
DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork
802.11 Mode
802.11b/g/n Mixed
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Click Network Settings > Wireless to open the General screen. Select More Secure as the
security level and WPA-PSK as the security mode. Configure the screen using the provided
parameters (see page 44). Click Apply.
Go to the Wireless > Others screen and select 802.11b/g/n Mixed in the 802.11 Mode field.
Click Apply.
Thomas can now use the WPS feature to establish a wireless connection between his notebook and
the ZyXEL Device (see Section 4.4.2 on page 46). He can also use the notebook’s wireless client to
search for the ZyXEL Device (see Section 4.4.3 on page 49).
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
45
Chapter 4 Tutorials
4.4.2 Using WPS
This section shows you how to set up a wireless network using WPS. It uses the ZyXEL Device as
the AP and ZyXEL NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to the notebook.
Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter
or PCMCIA card).
There are two WPS methods to set up the wireless client settings:
• Push Button Configuration (PBC) - simply press a button. This is the easier of the two
methods.
• PIN Configuration - configure a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on the ZyXEL Device. A
wireless client must also use the same PIN in order to download the wireless network settings
from the ZyXEL Device.
Push Button Configuration (PBC)
46
Make sure that your ZyXEL Device is turned on and your notebook is within the cover range of the
wireless signal.
Make sure that you have installed the wireless client driver and utility in your notebook.
In the wireless client utility, go to the WPS setting page. Enable WPS and press the WPS button
(Start or WPS button).
Push and hold the WPS button located on the ZyXEL Device’s front panel for more than 5 seconds.
Alternatively, you may log into ZyXEL Device’s web configurator and go to the Network Settings
> Wireless > WPS screen. Enable the WPS function and click Apply. Then click the Connect
button.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Note: Your ZyXEL Device has a WPS button located on its front panel as well as a WPS
button in its configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function: you
can use one or the other.
Note: It doesn’t matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second button
within two minutes of pressing the first one.
The ZyXEL Device sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to
two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the ZyXEL Device securely.
The following figure shows you an example of how to set up a wireless network and its security by
pressing a button on both ZyXEL Device and wireless client.
Example WPS Process: PBC Method
ZyXEL Device
Wireless Client
WPS
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
Press and hold for
5 seconds
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
47
Chapter 4 Tutorials
PIN Configuration
When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both the ZyXEL Device’s web
configurator and the wireless client’s utility.
Launch your wireless client’s configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method
to get a PIN number.
Log into ZyXEL Device’s web configurator and go to the Network Settings > Wireless > WPS
screen. Enable the WPS function and click Apply.
Enter the PIN number of the wireless client and click the Register button. Activate WPS function on
the wireless client utility screen within two minutes.
The ZyXEL Device authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to
the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to
communicate with the ZyXEL Device securely.
48
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
The following figure shows you how to set up a wireless network and its security on a ZyXEL Device
and a wireless client by using PIN method.
Example WPS Process: PIN Method
Wireless Client
ZyXEL Device
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
Authentication by PIN
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
4.4.3 Without WPS
Use the wireless adapter’s utility installed on the notebook to search for the “Example” SSID. Then
enter the “DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork” pre-shared key to establish an wireless Internet
connection.
Note: The ZyXEL Device supports IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g wireless clients. Make
sure that your notebook or computer’s wireless adapter supports one of these
standards.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
49
Chapter 4 Tutorials
4.5 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups
Company A wants to create different wireless network groups for different types of users as shown
in the following figure. Each group has its own SSID and security mode.
Company
Guest
VIP
• Employees in Company A will use a general Comapny wireless network group.
• Higher management level and important visitors will use the VIP group.
• Visiting guests will use the Guest group, which has a lower security mode.
Company A will use the following parameters to set up the wireless network groups.
50
COMPANY
VIP
GUEST
SSID
Company
VIP
Guest
Security Level
More Secure
More Secure
Basic
Security Mode
WPA2-PSK
WPA2-PSK
Static WEP
Pre-Shared Key
ForCompanyOnly
ForVIPOnly
Guest
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Click Network Settings > Wireless to open the General screen. Use this screen to set up the
company’s general wireless network group. Configure the screen using the provided parameters
and click Apply.
Click Network Settings > Wireless > More AP to open the following screen. Click the Edit icon
to configure the second wireless network group.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
51
Chapter 4 Tutorials
52
Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply.
In the More AP screen, click the Edit icon to configure the third wireless network group.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply.
Check the status of VIP and Guest in the More AP screen. The yellow bulbs signify that the SSIDs
are active and ready for wireless access.
4.6 Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding
Thomas manages the Doom server on a computer behind the ZyXEL Device. In order for players on
the Internet (like A in the figure below) to communicate with the Doom server, Thomas needs to
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
53
Chapter 4 Tutorials
configure the port settings and IP address on the ZyXEL Device. Traffic should be forwarded to the
port 666 of the Doom server computer which has an IP address of 192.168.1.34.
Tutorial: NAT Port Forwarding Setup
D=192.168.1.34
LAN
WAN
port 666
Thomas may set up the port settings by configuring the port settings for the Doom server computer
(see Section 11.2 on page 160 for more information).
54
Click Network Settings > NAT > Add new rule and configure the screen with the following
values:
Service Name
Doom_Server
WAN Interface
Select the WAN interface through which the Doom service is forwarded.
This example uses MyDSLConnection.
External Port/s
Enter 666 as the Start and End port.
Server IP Address
Enter the IP address of the Doom server. This is 192.168.1.34 for this
example.
Protocol
Select TCP/UDP. This should be the protocol supported by the Doom
server.
The screen should look as follows. Click Apply.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
The port forwarding settings you configured appear in the table. The ZyXEL Device forwards port
666 traffic to the computer with IP address 192.168.1.34.
Players on the Internet then can have access to Thomas’ Doom server.
4.7 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another
Network
In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions, you may connect a router to
the ZyXEL Device’s LAN. The router may be used to separate two department networks. This
tutorial shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings.
In the following figure, router R is connected to the ZyXEL Device’s LAN. R connects to two
networks, N1 (192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If you want to send traffic from
computer A (in N1 network) to computer B (in N2 network), the traffic is sent to the ZyXEL
Device’s WAN default gateway by default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic.
N1
N2
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
55
Chapter 4 Tutorials
You need to specify a static routing rule on the ZyXEL Device to specify R as the router in charge of
forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the ZyXEL Device routes traffic from A to R and then R routes
the traffic to B.
N1
N2
This tutorial uses the following example IP settings:
Table 4 IP Settings in this Tutorial
DEVICE / COMPUTER
IP ADDRESS
The ZyXEL Device’s WAN
172.16.1.1
The ZyXEL Device’s LAN
192.168.1.1
192.168.1.34
R’s N1
192.168.1.253
R’s N2
192.168.10.2
192.168.10.33
To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2:
56
Log into the ZyXEL Device’s Web Configurator in advanced mode.
Click Advanced > Routing.
Click Add New Static Route Entry in the Static Route screen.
Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings:
4a
Select the Active check box. Enter the Route Name as R.
4b
Type 192.168.10.0 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination, N2.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
4c
4d
4a
Select the interface that is in use.
Select Enable in the Use Gateway IP Address field. Type 192.168.1.253 (R’s N1 address)
in the Gateway IP Address field.
Click Apply.
Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally configure B’s firewall
settings to allow specific traffic to pass through.
4.8 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup
This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen.
Let’s say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office. You want to prioritize e-mail traffic
because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour. You also
upload data files (such as logs and e-mail archives) to the FTP server throughout the day. Your
colleagues use the Internet for research, as well as chat applications for communicating with other
branch offices.
In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission bandwidth of
10,000 kbps. For this example, you want to configure QoS so that e-mail traffic gets the highest
priority with at least 5,000 kbps. You can do the following:
• Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue (1) to e-mail traffic going to the WAN
interface, so that e-mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion.
• Note the IP address (192.168.1.23 for example) and/or MAC address (AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF for
example) of your computer and map it to queue 7.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
57
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Note: QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the ZyXEL Device.
Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS
mapping table on the ZyXEL Device.
QoS Example
DSL
10,000 kbps
Your computer
IP=192.168.1.23
and/or
MAC=AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF
E-mail traffic: Highest priority
A colleague’s computer
Other traffic: Automatic classifier
Click Network Settings > QoS > General and select Active. Set your WAN Managed
Upstream Bandwidth to 10,000 kbps (or leave this blank to have the ZyXEL Device automatically
determine this figure). Click Apply.
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS
Click Queue Setup > Add new Queue to create a new queue. In the screen that opens, check
Active and enter or select the following values:
• Name: E-mail
•
To Interface: WAN
• Priority: 1 (High)
• Weight: 8
58
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
• Rate Limit: 5,000 (kbps)
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup
Click Class Setup > Add new Classifier to create a new class. Check Active and follow the
settings as shown in the screen below.
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Class Setup
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
59
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Class Name
Give a class name to this traffic, such as E-mail in this example.
From Interface
This is the interface from which the traffic will be coming from. Select LAN1
for this example.
Ether Type
Select IP to identify the traffic source by its IP address or MAC address.
IP Address
Type the IP address of your computer - 192.168.1.23. Type the IP Subnet
Mask if you know it.
MAC Address
Type the MAC address of your computer - AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF. Type the
MAC Mask if you know it.
To Queue Index
Link this to an item in the Network Settings > QoS > Queue Setup
screen, which is the E-mail queue created in this example.
This maps e-mail traffic coming from port 25 to the highest priority, which you have created in the
previous screen (see the IP Protocol field). This also maps your computer’s IP address and MAC
address to the E-mail queue (see the Source fields).
Verify that the queue setup works by checking Network Settings > QoS > Monitor. This shows
the bandwidth allotted to e-mail traffic compared to other network traffic.
4.9 Access the ZyXEL Device Using DDNS
If you connect your ZyXEL Device to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address, it is
inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet. The ZyXEL Device’s WAN IP address
changes dynamically. Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows you to access the ZyXEL Device using a domain
name.
http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org
w.x.y.z
a.b.c.d
To use this feature, you have to apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org.
This tutorial covers:
• Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org
• Configuring DDNS on Your ZyXEL Device
• Testing the DDNS Setting
Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use DDNS.
60
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
4.9.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org
Open a browser and type http://www.dyndns.org.
Apply for a user account. This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the username and
password.
Log into www.dyndns.org using your account.
Add a new DDNS host name. This tutorial uses the following settings as an example.
• Hostname: zyxelrouter.dyndns.org
• Service Type: Host with IP address
• IP Address: Enter the WAN IP address that your ZyXEL Device is currently using. You can find the
IP address on the ZyXEL Device’s Web Configurator Status page.
Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the ZyXEL Device later.
4.9.2 Configuring DDNS on Your ZyXEL Device
Configure the following settings in the Advanced > DNS Setting > Dynamic DNS screen.
• Select Enable Dynamic DNS.
• Select DynDNS.org as the service provider.
• Type zyxelrouter.dyndns.org in the Host Name field.
• Enter the user name (UserName1) and password (12345).
Click Apply.
4.9.3 Testing the DDNS Setting
Now you should be able to access the ZyXEL Device from the Internet. To test this:
Open a web browser on the computer (using the IP address a.b.c.d) that is connected to the
Internet.
Type http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org and press [Enter].
The ZyXEL Device’s login page should appear. You can then log into the ZyXEL Device and manage
it.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
61
Chapter 4 Tutorials
62
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
P ART II
Technical Reference
63
64
C HAPT ER
Network Map and Status Screens
5.1 Overview
After you log into the Web Configurator, the Network Map screen appears. This shows the network
connection status of the ZyXEL Device and clients connected to it.
You can use the Status screen to look at the current status of the ZyXEL Device, system resources,
and interfaces (LAN, WAN, and WLAN).
5.2 The Network Map Screen
Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients. A warning
message appears if there is a connection problem.
If you prefer to view the status in a list, click List View in the Viewing Mode selection box. You
can configure how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen in Refresh Interval.
Figure 12 Network Map: Icon Mode
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
65
Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens
Figure 13 Network Map: List Mode
In Icon Mode, if you want to view information about a client, click the client’s name and Info.
Click the IP address if you want to change it. If you want to change the name or icon of the client,
click Change name/icon.
Figure 14 Icon Mode: Change name/icon
In List Mode, you can also view the client’s information and click on the IP address if you want to
change it.
66
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens
5.3 The Status Screen
Use this screen to view the status of the ZyXEL Device. Click Status to open this screen.
Figure 15 Status Screen
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 5 Status Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval
Select how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen.
Device Information
Host Name
This field displays the ZyXEL Device system name. It is used for identification.
Model Number
This shows the model number of your ZyXEL Device.
Firmware
Version
This is the current version of the firmware inside the device.
WAN Information (These fields display when you have a WAN connection.)
MAC Address
This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of
your device.
This field is available only when your WAN type is IPoE or PPPoE.
IP Address
This field displays the current IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the WAN.
IP Subnet Mask
This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN.
This field is available only when your WAN type is IPoE or IPoA.
WAN Type
This field displays the current WAN connection type.
LAN Information
MAC Address
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of
your device.
67
Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens
Table 5 Status Screen (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IP Address
This is the current IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the LAN.
IP Subnet
Mask
This is the current subnet mask in the LAN.
DHCP
This field displays what DHCP services the ZyXEL Device is providing to the LAN.
Choices are:
Server - The ZyXEL Device is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses
to other computers in the LAN.
Relay - The ZyXEL Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP
requests and responses between the remote server and the clients.
None - The ZyXEL Device is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN.
WLAN Information
MAC Address
This shows the wireless adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your
device.
Status
This displays whether WLAN is activated.
Name (SSID)
This is the descriptive name used to identify the ZyXEL Device in a wireless LAN.
Channel
This is the channel number used by the ZyXEL Device now.
Security Mode
This displays the type of security mode the ZyXEL Device is using in the wireless
LAN.
802.11 Mode
This displays the type of 802.11 mode the ZyXEL Device is using in the wireless
LAN.
WPS
This displays whether WPS is activated.
Interface Status
Interface
This column displays each interface the ZyXEL Device has.
Status
This field indicates whether or not the ZyXEL Device is using the interface.
For the LAN interfaces, the Ethernet WAN interface, or the HPNA interface, this
field displays Up when the ZyXEL Device is using the interface and NoLink when
the line is disconnected.
For the WLAN interface, it displays Active when WLAN is enabled or InActive
when WLAN is disabled.
For the DSL interface, this field displays NoLink (line is down), Up (line is up or
connected) if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and NoLink (line is down), Up
(line is up or connected), Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a call)
and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE encapsulation.
Rate
For the LAN interface, this displays the port speed and duplex setting.
For the DSL interface, it displays the downstream and upstream transmission
rate.
For the WLAN interface, it displays the maximum transmission rate when WLAN
is enabled or N/A when WLAN is disabled.
System Status
System Up
Time
This field displays how long the ZyXEL Device has been running since it last
started up. The ZyXEL Device starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it
(Maintenance > Reboot), or when you reset it.
Current Date/
Time
This field displays the current date and time in the ZyXEL Device. You can
change this in Maintenance> Time Setting.
System Resource
68
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens
Table 5 Status Screen (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
CPU Usage
This field displays what percentage of the ZyXEL Device’s processing ability is
currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the ZyXEL Device is
running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you
want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other
applications (for example, using QoS; see Chapter 10 on page 139).
Memory
Usage
This field displays what percentage of the ZyXEL Device’s memory is currently
used. Usually, this percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does
get close to 100%, the ZyXEL Device is probably becoming unstable, and you
should restart the device. See Section 31.2 on page 259, or turn off the device
(unplug the power) for a few seconds.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
69
Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens
70
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Broadband
6.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to configure WAN settings from the Broadband screen. Use this screen
to configure your ZyXEL Device for Internet access.
If the DSLAM of your ISP supports DSL bonding, you can connect the two DSL ports on the ZyXEL
Device to two separate telephone jacks and enable the bonding feature in the DSL screen. The
bonding feature provides increased throughput at longer distances.
A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the
Internet. It connects your private networks (such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other
networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations.
Figure 16 LAN and WAN
LAN
WAN
6.1.1 What You Need to Know
Encapsulation Method
Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set
up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your
ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP
over Ethernet) or PPPoA, they should also provide a username and password (and service name)
for user authentication.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
71
Chapter 6 Broadband
WAN IP Address
The WAN IP address is an IP address for the ZyXEL Device, which makes it accessible from an
outside network. It is used by the ZyXEL Device to communicate with other devices in other
networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the ZyXEL Device
tries to access the Internet.
If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and
DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet encapsulation
method).
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is a LAN and WAN networking technology that provides highspeed data transfer. ATM uses fixed-size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS
(Quality of Service) can be guaranteed. ATM uses a connection-oriented model and establishes a
virtual circuit (VC) between two endpoints before the actual data exchange begins.
PTM
Packet Transfer Mode (PTM) is packet-oriented and supported by the VDSL2 standard. In PTM,
packets are encapsulated directly in the High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) frames. It is designed
to provide a low-overhead, transparent way of transporting packets over DSL links, as an
alternative to ATM.
Multicast
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient)
or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of
hosts on the network - not everybody and not just one.
IGMP
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership
in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. There are three versions of IGMP. IGMP
version 2 and 3 are improvements over version 1, but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use.
Finding Out More
See Section 6.4 on page 82 for technical background information on WAN.
6.1.2 Before You Begin
You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this
information from your ISP.
72
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Broadband
6.2 The Broadband Screen
Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s Internet access settings. Click Network Settings>
Broadband from the menu. The summary table shows you the configured WAN services
(connections) on the ZyXEL Device.
Figure 17 Network Settings > Broadband
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 6 Network Settings > Broadband
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
PTM over ADSL
Select Enable to use PTM over ADSL. Since PTM has less overhead than ATM,
some ISPs use PTM over ADSL for better performance.
Add new WAN
interface
Click this button to create a new connection.
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This is the status of the connection.
Name
This is the service name of the connection.
Type
This shows whether it is a VDSL, ADSL, or Ethernet connection.
Encapsulation
This is the method of encapsulation used by this connection.
VLAN
This is the Virtual LAN (VLAN) number configured for this WAN connection.
VPI/VCI
This is the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI)
numbers configured for this WAN connection.
ATM QoS
This is the type of ATM QoS of the connection.
IGMP Proxy
This shows whether the ZyXEL Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection.
NAT
This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection.
Default Gateway
This shows whether the ZyXEL Device use the WAN interface of this connection
as the system default gateway.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection.
Click the Delete icon to remove the WAN connection.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
73
Chapter 6 Broadband
6.2.1 Add/Edit Broadband
Click Add new WAN interface in the Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to an existing WAN
interface to configure a WAN connection. The screen differs according to the mode and
encapsulation you choose.
This screen displays when you select Routing mode and PPPoE encapsulation.
Figure 18 Broadband: Add/Edit: PPPoE Encapsulation
74
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Broadband
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 7 Broadband: Add/Edit: PPPoE Encapsulation
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
General
Active
Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings.
Name
Specify a descriptive name for this connection. This field is view only if you are
editing the WAN connection.
Type
Select whether it is ADSL/VDSL over PTM, ADSL over ATM, or Ethernet
connection.
•
•
•
ADSL/VDSL over PTM: The ZyXEL Device uses the VDSL technology for
data transmission over the DSL port.
ADSL over ATM: The ZyXEL Device uses the ADSL technology for data
transmission over the DSL port.
Ethernet: The ZyXEL Device transmits data over the Ethernet WAN port.
Select this if you have a DSL router or modem in your network already.
Mode
Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP give you one IP
address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account.
Encapsulation
Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list
box. This option is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field.
•
•
•
•
PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE): PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet)
provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dialup services using PPP. Select this if you have a username and password for
Internet access.
IP over Ethernet (IPoE): In this type of Internet connection, IP packets
are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then
formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment.
PPP over ATM (PPPoA): PPPoA allows just one PPPoA connection over a
PVC.
IP over ATM (IPoA): IPoA allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection
over a PVC.
If your connection type is ADSL/VDSL over PTM or Ethernet, the choices are
PPPoE and IPoE.
If your connection type is ADSL over ATM, the choices are PPPoE, PPPoA,
IPoE and IPoA.
ATM PVC Configuration (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL over ATM.)
VPI
The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.
VCI
The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local
management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.
DSL Link Type
This field is not editable. The selection depends on the setting in the
Encapsulation field.
EoA (Ethernet over ATM) uses an Ethernet header in the packet, so that you can
have multiple services/connections over one PVC. You can set each connection
to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use
different VLAN IDs for different services. EoA supports ENET ENCAP (IPoE),
PPPoE and RFC1483/2684 bridging encapsulation methods.
PPPoA (PPP over ATM) allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC.
IPoA (IP over ATM) allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
75
Chapter 6 Broadband
Table 7 Broadband: Add/Edit: PPPoE Encapsulation (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Encapsulation
Mode
Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box.
Choices are:
•
•
•
•
Service Category
LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are
encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP
header. This is available only when you select IPoE or PPPoE in the Select
DSL Link Type field.
VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual
circuit (VC). To transport multiple protocols, the ZyXEL Device needs
separate VCs. There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network
protocol carried on the VC. This reduces payload overhead since there is no
need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit (PDU) payload.
LLC/ENCAPSULATION: More than one protocol can be carried over the
same VC. This is available only when you select PPPoA in the
Encapsulation field.
LLC/SNAP-ROUTING: In LCC encapsulation, an IEEE 802.2 Logical Link
Control (LLC) header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs.
The LCC header can be followed by an IEEE 802.1a SubNetwork Attachment
Point (SNAP) header. This is available only when you select IPoA in the
Encapsulation field.
Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non-time
sensitive, such as e-mail.
Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for
voice or data traffic.
Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections
that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty
connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Peak Cell Rate
Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak
Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells.
Type the PCR here. This field is not available when you select UBR Without
PCR.
Sustain Cell Rate
The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be
transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system
default is 0 cells/sec.
This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime
VBR.
Maximum Burst
Size
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be
sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535.
This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime
VBR.
PPP Information
This is available only when you select PPPoE or PPPoA in the Mode field.
PPP User Name
Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the
form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both
components exactly as given.
PPP Password
Enter the password associated with the user name above.
PPP Auto Connect
Select this option if you do not want the connection to time out.
Idle Timeout
This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router
automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server.
This field is not configurable if you select PPP Auto Connect.
PPPoE Service
Name
76
Enter the name of your PPPoE service here.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Broadband
Table 7 Broadband: Add/Edit: PPPoE Encapsulation (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
PPPoE
Passthrough
This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation.
In addition to the ZyXEL Device’s built-in PPPoE client, you can enable PPPoE
pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on
their computers to connect to the ISP via the ZyXEL Device. Each host can have
a separate account and a public WAN IP address.
PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not
appropriate.
Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use
PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP.
IP Address
Obtain an IP
Address
Automatically
A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is
not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the
Internet. Select this if you have a dynamic IP address.
Static IP Address
Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
IP Address
Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP.
IP Subnet
Mask
Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP.
Gateway IP
Address
Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP.
Routing Feature
NAT Enable
Select this option to activate NAT on this connection.
IGMP Proxy
Enable
Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to
establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data.
Select this option to have the ZyXEL Device act as an IGMP proxy on this
connection. This allows the ZyXEL Device to get subscribing information and
maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast
traffic significantly.
Apply as Default
Gateway
Select this option to have the ZyXEL Device use the WAN interface of this
connection as the system default gateway.
DNS Server
This is available only when you select Apply as Default Gateway in the
Routing Feature field.
DNS
Select Dynamic if you want the ZyXEL Device use the DNS server addresses
assigned by your ISP.
Select Static if you want the ZyXEL Device use the DNS server addresses you
configure manually.
DNS Server 1
Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
DNS Server 2
Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
VLAN (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL/VDSL over PTM or Ethernet.)
Active
Select this option to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic
through this connection.
802.1p
IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAClayer frame that contains bits to define class of service.
Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level to add to traffic through this connection.
The greater the number, the higher the priority level.
802.1q
Type the VLAN ID number for traffic through this connection.
QoS
If you want to set a rate limit for the connection, enter it in the Rate Limit field.
This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this connection.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
77
Chapter 6 Broadband
Table 7 Broadband: Add/Edit: PPPoE Encapsulation (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
6.2.1.1 Bridge
This screen displays when you select the Bridge mode.
Figure 19 Broadband: Add/Edit: Bridge Mode
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 8 Broadband: Add/Edit: Bridge Mode
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
General
Active
Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings.
Name
Specify a descriptive name for this connection.
Type
Select whether it is ADSL/VDSL over PTM, ADSL over ATM, or Ethernet
connection.
•
•
•
Mode
ADSL/VDSL over PTM: The ZyXEL Device uses the VDSL technology for
data transmission over the DSL port.
ADSL over ATM: The ZyXEL Device uses the ADSL technology for data
transmission over the DSL port.
Ethernet: The ZyXEL Device transmits data over the Ethernet WAN port.
Select this if you have a DSL router or modem in your network already.
Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you
want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP’s DHCP
server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as
Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s).
ATM PVC Configuration
VPI
78
The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Broadband
Table 8 Broadband: Add/Edit: Bridge Mode (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
VCI
The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local
management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.
DSL Link Type
This field is not editable. EoA (Ethernet over ATM) uses an Ethernet header in
the packet, so that you can have multiple services/connections over one PVC.
You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections
share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services.
Encapsulation
Mode
Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box.
Choices are:
•
•
Service Category
LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are
encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP
header.
VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual
circuit (VC). To transport multiple protocols, the ZyXEL Device needs
separate VCs. There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network
protocol carried on the VC. This reduces payload overhead since there is no
need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit (PDU) payload.
Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non-time
sensitive, such as e-mail.
Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for
voice or data traffic.
Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections
that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty
connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Peak Cell Rate
Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak
Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells.
Type the PCR here. This field is not available when you select UBR Without
PCR.
Sustain Cell Rate
The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be
transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system
default is 0 cells/sec.
This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime
VBR.
Maximum Burst
Size
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be
sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535.
This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime
VBR.
VLAN (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL/VDSL over PTM or Ethernet)
Active
Select this option to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic
through this connection.
802.1p
IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAClayer frame that contains bits to define class of service.
Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this
connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level.
802.1q
Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection.
QoS
If you want to set a rate limit for the connection, enter it in the Rate Limit field.
This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this connection.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
79
Chapter 6 Broadband
6.3 The DSL Screen
If the DSLAM of your ISP supports DSL bonding, you can connect the two DSL ports on the ZyXEL
Device to two separate telephone jacks and enable the bonding feature in the DSL screen.
DSL signals have distance limitations. VDSL2 (profile 17a) supports greater speed but offer shorter
distances (within 3000 ft). The farther away the subscribers are from the DSLAM, the slower the
speed. VDSL (profile 12a) provides longer distance range (over 3000 ft) but at lower speeds. DSL
bonding allows subscribers to use data streams spread over two DSL lines in order to (almost)
double the speed at longer distances. You may choose to use DSL bonding if the DSLAM supports it
and there are two DSL lines to the DSLAM.
The total available bandwidth for the subscriber then becomes the sum of the bandwidth available
for each of the subscriber’s line connections. The data rate depends on the DSL type, its standard/
profile, and the standard/profile that the DSLAM supports. The table below shows the transmission
data rate for single DSL line and DSL bonding.
Table 9 Comparison Table for Single DSL line and DSL Bonding
ITEM
VDSL2
VDSL BONDING
ADSL2+
ADSL(2+)
BONDING
PROFILE/
STANDARD
G993.2 Profile 17a
G993.2 Profile 12a
G.992.5
G.992.5
MAX.
DOWNSTREAM/
UPSTREAM
100/60 Mbps
50/25 x 2 = 100/50
Mbps
25/1 Mbps
25/1 x 2 = 50/2
Mbps
DISTANCE
within 3000 ft
over 3000 ft
over 5000 ft
5000 to 7000 ft
For a single VDSL line, the profile is 17a, which provides a maximum data rate of 100/60 Mbps
(downstream/upstream). If VDSL bonding is used, the supported profile is 12a, which provides a
maximum data rate of 50/25 Mbps for each VDSL line. The ideal total data rate for the bonded
connection is 100/50 Mbps.
For a single ADSL line, the standard with the highest data rate supported is ADSL2+, which
provides 25/1 Mbps data rate. When ADSL bonding is used, the data rate doubles to 50/2 Mbps.
In addition, DSL bonding supports ADSL bonding fallback. If a VDSL connection cannot be
established, the ZyXEL Device tries to use ADSL. If the VDSL connection is re-established, the
ZyXEL Device automatically switches back to VDSL. You must enable DSL bonding in order to use
ADSL fallback.
80
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Broadband
Click Broadband > DSL to display the following screen.
Figure 20 Broadband > DSL
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 10 Broadband > DSL
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DSL Bonding
State
Select Enable to use the DSL bonding and ADSL fallback features. Make sure
your ISP supports these functions.
Multi-PHY
Current
This shows the current bonding mode the ZyXEL Device is using. You can
change it in the Mode field.
Mode
Select whether you want to use Auto Switch, VDSL Bonding, or ADSL
Bonding. If you select Auto Switch, the ZyXEL Device automatically switches
to ADSL bonding when the VDSL bonding is not available. The bonding
switches back to VSDL when it is re-established.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
81
Chapter 6 Broadband
6.4 Technical Reference
This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this
chapter.
6.4.1 Encapsulation
Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The ZyXEL Device supports the
following methods.
6.4.1.1 PPP over Ethernet
The ZyXEL Device supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF Draft
standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem
(DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPPoE option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE.
For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing
access control systems (for example RADIUS).
One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a
function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and
offer new IP services for individuals.
Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no
specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.
By implementing PPPoE directly on the ZyXEL Device (rather than individual computers), the
computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the ZyXEL Device does that part
of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs’ computers will have access.
6.4.1.2 PPPoA
PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection
functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The ZyXEL Device encapsulates the PPP session based
on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service
Provider’s (ISP) DSLAM (Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Access Multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364
for more information on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP.
82
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Broadband
6.4.2 Multiplexing
There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to
use the multiplexing method required by your ISP.
VC-based Multiplexing
In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for
example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where
dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical.
LLC-based Multiplexing
In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained
in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be
advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if
charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs.
6.4.3 VPI and VCI
Be sure to use the correct Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) numbers
assigned to you. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is
reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Please see the appendix for more information.
6.4.4 IP Address Assignment
A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a
different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have
either a dynamic or static IP.
IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation
If you have a dynamic IP, then the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields are not applicable
(N/A). If you have a static IP, then you only need to fill in the IP Address field and not the
Gateway IP Address field.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
83
Chapter 6 Broadband
6.4.5 NAT
NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in
a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a
different IP address known within another network.
6.4.6 Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate
and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate
congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video
connections.
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may
be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a
maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed
because it is dependent on the line speed.
Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the
maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be
greater than the PCR.
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS
is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more
cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again.
If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that
correlates to your upstream line rate.
The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS.
Figure 21 Example of Traffic Shaping
6.4.7 ATM Traffic Classes
These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0
Specification.
84
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Broadband
Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being
sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections
that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds
this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution
video and voice.
Variable Bit Rate (VBR)
The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use
the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time
(VBR-nRT) connections.
The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely
controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is
specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would
be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth
requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics.
The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not
require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical
on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an
VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers.
Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR)
The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers. However, UBR doesn't
guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An
example application is background file transfer.
6.4.8 Introduction to VLANs
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one
group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same
group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.
In Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the
subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network
resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of
another user in the same building.
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more
manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets
go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast
domain.
Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN
A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership
of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
85
Chapter 6 Broadband
VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a
frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame
across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two
bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier), residing within the type/length field of the Ethernet frame)
and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information), starts after the source address field of the Ethernet
frame).
The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If
a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as
it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum
number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A
frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority
level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the
4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved,
so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094.
86
TPID
User Priority
CFI
VLAN ID
2 Bytes
3 Bits
1 Bit
12 Bits
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Wireless
7.1 Overview
This chapter describes the ZyXEL Device’s Network Settings > Wireless screens. Use these
screens to set up your ZyXEL Device’s wireless connection.
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
This section describes the ZyXEL Device’s Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your
ZyXEL Device’s wireless connection.
• Use the General screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless
security mode (Section 7.2 on page 88).
• Use the More AP screen to set up multiple wireless networks on your ZyXEL Device (Section 7.3
on page 95).
• Use the MAC Authentication screen to allow or deny wireless clients based on their MAC
addresses from connecting to the ZyXEL Device (Section 7.4 on page 97).
• Use the WPS screen to enable or disable WPS, view or generate a security PIN (Personal
Identification Number) (Section 7.5 on page 98).
• Use the Others screen to configure wireless advanced features, such as the RTS/CTS Threshold
(Section 7.6 on page 100).
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
87
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.1.2 What You Need to Know
Wireless Basics
“Wireless” is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and
receive information over the airwaves, wireless networking devices exchange information with one
another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange
information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking
devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to
use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in
that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data
encryption.
Finding Out More
See Section 7.7 on page 101 for advanced technical information on wireless networks.
7.2 The General Screen
Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode.
Note: If you are configuring the ZyXEL Device from a computer connected to the wireless
LAN and you change the ZyXEL Device’s SSID, channel or security settings, you will
lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then
change the wireless settings of your computer to match the ZyXEL Device’s new
settings.
88
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
Click Network Settings > Wireless to open the General screen.
Figure 22 Network Settings > Wireless > General
The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen.
Table 11 Network Settings > Wireless > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Network Setup
Wireless
You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field.
Channel
Set the channel depending on your particular region.
Select a channel or use Auto to have the ZyXEL Device automatically determine a
channel to use. If you are having problems with wireless interference, changing the
channel may help. Try to use a channel that is as many channels away from any
channels used by neighboring APs as possible. The channel number which the
ZyXEL Device is currently using then displays next to this field.
more.../less
Click more... to show more information. Click less to hide them.
Bandwidth
Select whether the ZyXEL Device uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz or
20MHz/40MHz.
A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a
40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps.
40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to
increase throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz. It is often
better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the
wireless signal.
Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in
your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding.
Select 20MHz/40MHz to allow the ZyXEL Device to adjust the channel bandwidth
depending on network conditions.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
89
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 11 Network Settings > Wireless > General (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Network Settings
Wireless
Network Name
(SSID)
The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless
device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must
have the same SSID.
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless
LAN.
Hide SSID
Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station
cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Client Isolation
Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with each
other through the ZyXEL Device.
MBSSID/LAN
Isolation
Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with clients
in other SSIDs or wired LAN devices through the ZyXEL Device.
Select both Client Isolation and MBSSID/LAN Isolation to allow this SSID’s
wireless clients to only connect to the Internet through the ZyXEL Device.
Enhanced
Multicast
Forwarding
Select this check box to allow the ZyXEL Device to convert wireless multicast traffic
into wireless unicast traffic.
Security Level
Security Mode
Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add security on
this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network
must have same wireless security settings as the ZyXEL Device. When you select to
use a security, additional options appears in this screen.
Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without
any data encryption or authentication.
See the following sections for more details about this field.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
7.2.1 No Security
Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any
data encryption or authentication.
Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your ZyXEL Device, your network is
accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range.
Figure 23 Wireless > General: No Security
90
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 12 Wireless > General: No Security
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Level
Choose No Security from the drop-down list box.
7.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption)
WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points
(AP) to keep network communications private. Both the wireless stations and the access points
must use the same WEP key.
Note: WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using
widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more
effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the
wireless devices in your network support. For example, use WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
if all your wireless devices support it, or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices
support it and you have a RADIUS server. If your wireless devices support nothing
stronger than WEP, use the highest encryption level available.
Your ZyXEL Device allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one key
can be enabled at any one time.
In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click Network Settings > Wireless to display
the General screen, then select Basic as the security level.
Figure 24 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP)
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
91
Chapter 7 Wireless
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 13 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Level
Select Basic to enable WEP data encryption.
Generate
password
automatically
Select this option to have the ZyXEL Device automatically generate a password. The
password field will not be configurable when you select this option.
Password 1~4
The password (WEP keys) are used to encrypt data. Both the ZyXEL Device and the
wireless stations must use the same password (WEP key) for data transmission.
If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal
characters ("0-9", "A-F").
If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal
characters ("0-9", "A-F").
You must configure at least one password, only one password can be activated at
any one time.
92
more.../less
Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them.
WEP
Encryption
Select 64-bits or 128-bits.
This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK)
The WPA-PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over
WEP. Using a Pre-Shared Key (PSK), both the ZyXEL Device and the connecting client share a
common password in order to validate the connection. This type of encryption, while robust, is not
as strong as WPA, WPA2 or even WPA2-PSK. The WPA2-PSK security mode is a newer, more robust
version of the WPA encryption standard. It offers slightly better security, although the use of PSK
makes it less robust than it could be.
Click Network Settings > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the
security level. Then select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list.
Figure 25 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 14 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Level
Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption.
Security Mode
Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box.
Generate
password
automatically
Select this option to have the ZyXEL Device automatically generate a password.
The password field will not be configurable when you select this option.
Password
The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same.
The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common
password, instead of user-specific credentials.
Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 64 case-sensitive keyboard characters.
more.../less
Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them.
WPA-PSK
Compatible
This field appears when you choose WPA-PSK2 as the Security Mode.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Check this field to allow wireless devices using WPA-PSK security mode to
connect to your ZyXEL Device. The ZyXEL Device supports WPA-PSK and WPA2PSK simultaneously.
93
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 14 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Encryption
Select the encryption type (AES or TKIP+AES) for data encryption.
Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES.
Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES.
Group Key
Update Timer
The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a
new group key out to all clients.
ReKey Method
The ZyXEL Device can automatically disconnect a wireless station from the wired
network after a period of inactivity or after a certain number of packets have
been processed. The wireless station needs to enter the username and password
again before access to the wired network is allowed.
•
•
Select TIME to have the ZyXEL Device automatically disconnects a wireless
station from the wired network after a period of inactivity.
Select NONE if you do not want the connection between the ZyXEL Device
and a wireless station to time out.
7.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication
The WPA2 security mode is currently the most robust form of encryption for wireless networks. It
requires a RADIUS server to authenticate user credentials and is a full implementation the security
protocol. Use this security option for maximum protection of your network. However, it is the least
backwards compatible with older devices.
The WPA security mode is a security subset of WPA2. It requires the presence of a RADIUS server
on your network in order to validate user credentials. This encryption standard is slightly older than
WPA2 and therefore is more compatible with older devices.
Click Network Settings > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the
security level. Then select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list.
Figure 26 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)
94
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 15 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Level
Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption.
Security Mode
Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop-down list box.
Authentication Server
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal
notation.
Port Number
Enter the port number of the external authentication server.
You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you
to do so with additional information.
Shared Secret
Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared
between the external authentication server and the ZyXEL Device.
The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your
ZyXEL Device. The key is not sent over the network.
more.../less
Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them.
WPA Compatible
This field is only available for WPA2. Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to
support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously.
Encryption
Select the encryption type (AES or TKIP+AES) for data encryption.
Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES.
Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES.
Group Key Update
Timer
The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a
new group key out to all clients.
ReKey Method
The ZyXEL Device can automatically disconnect a wireless station from the
wired network after a period of inactivity or after a certain number of packets
have been processed. The wireless station needs to enter the username and
password again before access to the wired network is allowed.
•
•
Select TIME to have the ZyXEL Device automatically disconnects a wireless
station from the wired network after a period of inactivity.
Select NONE if you do not want the connection between the ZyXEL Device
and a wireless station to time out.
7.3 The More AP Screen
This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets (BSSs) on the ZyXEL
Device.
Click Network Settings > Wireless > More AP. The following screen displays.
Figure 27 Network Settings > Wireless > More AP
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
95
Chapter 7 Wireless
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 16 Network Settings > Wireless > More AP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field indicates whether this SSID is active. A yellow bulb signifies that this
SSID is active. A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active.
SSID
An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the ZyXEL Device’s
BSSs. The SSID (Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a
wireless device is associated.
This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a
wireless client scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast
and seen in the wireless client utility.
Security
This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile.
7.3.1 Edit More AP
Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen.
The following screen displays.
Figure 28 More AP: Edit
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 17 More AP: Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Network Setup
Wireless
You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field.
Wireless Network Settings
96
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 17 More AP: Edit (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Network
Name (SSID)
The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a
wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access
point (AP) must have the same SSID.
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the
wireless LAN.
Hide SSID
Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a
station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Security Level
Security Mode
Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add
security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to
associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the
ZyXEL Device. After you select to use a security, additional options appears
in this screen.
Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network
without any data encryption or authentication.
See Section 7.2.1 on page 90 for more details about this field.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
7.4 MAC Authentication
This screen allows you to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to specific devices
(Allow) or exclude specific devices from accessing the ZyXEL Device (Deny). Every Ethernet
device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the
factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You
need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen.
Use this screen to view your ZyXEL Device’s MAC filter settings and add new MAC filter rules. Click
Wireless > MAC Authentication. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 29 Wireless > MAC Authentication
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
97
Chapter 7 Wireless
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 18 Wireless > MAC Authentication
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
SSID
Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filter settings.
MAC List
Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table.
Select Disable to turn off MAC filtering.
Select Allow to permit access to the ZyXEL Device. MAC addresses not listed will be
denied access to the ZyXEL Device.
Select Deny to block access to the ZyXEL Device. MAC addresses not listed will be
allowed to access the ZyXEL Device.
Add new
MAC address
Click this if you want to add a new MAC address entry to the MAC filter list below.
This is the index number of the entry.
MAC Address
This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to
the ZyXEL Device.
Modify
Click the Delete icon to delete the entry.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to
the ZyXEL Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC
address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example,
12:34:56:78:9a:bc.
7.5 The WPS Screen
Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your ZyXEL Device.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to
configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection between two devices. Both
devices must support WPS. See Section 7.7.8.3 on page 109 for more information about WPS.
Note: The ZyXEL Device applies the security settings of the SSID1 profile (see Section
7.2 on page 88). If you want to use the WPS feature, make sure you have set the
security mode of SSID1 to WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK or No Security.
98
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
Click Network Settings > Wireless > WPS. The following screen displays. Select Enable and
click Apply to activate the WPS function. Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen.
Figure 30 Network Settings > Wireless > WPS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 19 Network Settings > Wireless > WPS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable WPS
Select Enable to activate WPS on the ZyXEL Device.
Method 1
Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button
Configuration (PBC).
Connect
Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless
range of the ZyXEL Device) to your wireless network. This button may either be
a physical button on the outside of device, or a menu button similar to the
Connect button on this screen.
Note: You must press the other wireless device’s WPS button within two minutes
of pressing this button.
Method 2
Register
Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the
client into the ZyXEL Device.
Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and
click Register to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless
network.
You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the
device’s settings.
Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it
present its PIN to the ZyXEL Device.
Method 3
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the
ZyXEL Device into the client.
99
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 19 Network Settings > Wireless > WPS (continued)
LABEL
Release
Configuration
DESCRIPTION
The default WPS status is configured.
Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings
for WPS connections on the ZyXEL Device.
Generate New
PIN Number
The PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the ZyXEL Device is shown here.
Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to
using WPS.
The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method.
Click the Generate New PIN Number button to have the ZyXEL Device create
a new PIN.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
7.6 The Others Screen
Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Click Network Settings > Wireless >
Others. The screen appears as shown.
See Section 7.7.2 on page 103 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen.
Figure 31 Network Settings > Wireless > Others
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 20 Network Settings > Wireless > Others
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
RTS/CTS
Threshold
Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS (Request To
Send)/CTS (Clear To Send) handshake.
Enter a value between 0 and 2347.
100
Fragmentation
Threshold
This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between
256 and 2346.
Number of
Wireless
Stations Allowed
Specify the maximum number of the wireless stations that may connect to the
ZyXEL Device.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 20 Network Settings > Wireless > Others (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Output Power
Set the output power of the ZyXEL Device. If there is a high density of APs in an
area, decrease the output power to reduce interference with other APs. Select one
of the following: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% or 100%.
802.11 Mode
Select 802.11b Only to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to
associate with the ZyXEL Device.
Select 802.11g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to
associate with the ZyXEL Device.
Select 802.11n Only to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to
associate with the ZyXEL Device.
Select 802.11b/g Mixed to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant
WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device. The transmission rate of your
ZyXEL Device might be reduced.
Select 802.11b/g/n Mixed to allow IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g or IEEE802.11n
compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device. The transmission rate
of your ZyXEL Device might be reduced.
802.11
Protection
Enabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mixed-mode networks
(networks with both IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g traffic).
Select Auto to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS/CTS
handshake. This helps improve IEEE 802.11g performance.
Select Off to disable 802.11 protection. The transmission rate of your ZyXEL
Device might be reduced in a mixed-mode network.
This field displays Off and is not configurable when you set 802.11 Mode to
802.11b Only.
Preamble
Select a preamble type from the drop-down list box. Choices are Long or Short.
See Section 7.7.7 on page 107 for more information.
This field is configurable only when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b Only or
802.11b/g Mixed.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
7.7 Technical Reference
This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see the appendix.
7.7.1 Wireless Network Overview
Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges.
• A wireless client is a radio connected to a user’s computer.
• An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with
numerous wireless clients and let them access the network.
• A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients,
extending a network’s range.
Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
101
Chapter 7 Wireless
• An “infrastructure” type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless
clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points.
• An “ad-hoc” type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to
one another in order to exchange information.
The following figure provides an example of a wireless network.
Figure 32 Example of a Wireless Network
The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the
access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your
ZyXEL Device is the AP.
Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID.
The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentifier.
• If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel.
Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or
frequency, to send and receive information.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP.
Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the
information that is sent in the wireless network.
Radio Channels
In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For
the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a
102
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you
create a network, you must select a channel to use.
Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of
available channels also varies.
7.7.2 Additional Wireless Terms
The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the ZyXEL
Device’s Web Configurator.
Table 21 Additional Wireless Terms
TERM
DESCRIPTION
RTS/CTS Threshold
In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices are
sometimes not aware of each other’s presence. This may cause them to send
information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding
and not getting through.
By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must
sometimes get permission to send information to the ZyXEL Device. The
lower the value, the more often the devices must get permission.
If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below),
then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to
the ZyXEL Device.
Preamble
A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two
preamble modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode
than the ZyXEL Device does, it cannot communicate with the ZyXEL Device.
Authentication
The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the
wireless network.
Fragmentation
Threshold
A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a
larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy.
7.7.3 Wireless Security Overview
By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this
means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data
passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to
the network, he or she can steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to
compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to
ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried
on it.
These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people
presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a “key” phrase) can access the
network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only
people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been
authenticated are given the code key.
These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired
Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a
determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a
user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is very secure if you
use a long key which is difficult for an attacker’s software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
103
Chapter 7 Wireless
long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short
key which is very easy to guess - for example, a three-letter word from the dictionary.
Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, it’s not just people who have
sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless
network should ensure that effective security is in place.
A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure
information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random
and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and
her favorite movie is Vanishing Point (which you know was made in 1971) you could use
“70dodchal71vanpoi” as your security key.
The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless
network.
7.7.3.1 SSID
Normally, the ZyXEL Device acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You
can hide the SSID instead, in which case the ZyXEL Device does not broadcast the SSID. In
addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess.
This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless
devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that
is sent in the wireless network.
7.7.3.2 MAC Address Filter
Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC
address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example,
00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless
network, see the device’s User’s Guide or other documentation.
You can use the MAC address filter to tell the ZyXEL Device which devices are allowed or not
allowed to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to
have the correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the
wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct information.
This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network.
Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an
authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network.
7.7.3.3 User Authentication
Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless
network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it. However, every
device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this.
For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS
server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server,
you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users.
104
1.
Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds
of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.
2.
Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network,
even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized
wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and
password to use the wireless network.
7.7.3.4 Encryption
Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless
network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot
understand the message.
The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication. (See Section 7.7.3.3
on page 104 for information about this.)
Table 22 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication
Weakest
NO AUTHENTICATION
RADIUS SERVER
No Security
WPA
Static WEP
WPA-PSK
Strongest
WPA2-PSK
WPA2
For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users
do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or
WPA2-PSK.
Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network
supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the ZyXEL Device and you do not
have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two
devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should
set up Static WEP in the wireless network.
Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger
encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still
possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information
pretty quickly.
When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your ZyXEL Device, you can also select an option (WPA
compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some
support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network
login) and select the WPA compatible option in the ZyXEL Device.
Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer
the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key.
7.7.4 Signal Problems
Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance,
interference and absorption.
Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference
occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
105
Chapter 7 Wireless
transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are
coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when
physical objects (such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal.
7.7.5 BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a
wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is
disabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other.
When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is enabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired
network but cannot communicate with each other.
Figure 33 Basic Service set
7.7.6 MBSSID
Traditionally, you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets (BSSs). As well
as the cost of buying extra APs, there is also the possibility of channel interference. The ZyXEL
Device’s MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point
to provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security
modes to different SSIDs.
Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP.
106
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.7.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs
• A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously.
• You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs
(they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each other’s
communications (but not communicate with each other).
• MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security.
7.7.7 Preamble Type
Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of
the synchronization field in a packet.
Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending
data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short
preamble.
Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network
support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks.
Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide
more efficient communications.
Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the
network support it, otherwise the ZyXEL Device uses long preamble.
Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate.
7.7.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS)
Your ZyXEL Device supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure
wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to
configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both
devices must support WPS (check each device’s documentation to make sure).
Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its
configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device
to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two
minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set
up a secure network by themselves.
7.7.8.1 Push Button Configuration
WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled
device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information.
Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in
their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button.
Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
107
Chapter 7 Wireless
Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another.
Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration
utility and locate the button (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to do this - for the ZyXEL
Device, see Section 7.6 on page 100).
Press the button on one of the devices (it doesn’t matter which). For the ZyXEL Device you must
press the WPS button for more than three seconds.
Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name
(SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee.
If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s
configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.
7.7.8.2 PIN Configuration
Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be
static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking
on a button in the configuration interface).
Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure
that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to
activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of
both devices to use the PIN method.
When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client)
into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated
on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends
the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network.
Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router
(referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method.
108
Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices.
Access the WPS section of the AP’s configuration interface. See the device’s User’s Guide for how to
do this.
Look for the client’s WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the
client’s configuration interface (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the
ZyXEL Device, see Section 7.5 on page 98).
Enter the client’s PIN in the AP’s configuration interface.
If the client device’s configuration interface has an area for entering another device’s PIN, you can
either enter the client’s PIN in the AP, or enter the AP’s PIN in the client - it does not matter which.
Start WPS on both devices within two minutes.
Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect,
WPS was successful.
If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If
you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer)
connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method.
Figure 34 Example WPS Process: PIN Method
ENROLLEE
REGISTRAR
WPS
This device’s
WPS PIN: 123456
WPS
Enter WPS PIN
from other device:
WPS
START
WPS
START
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
SECURE EAP TUNNEL
SSID
WPA(2)-PSK
COMMUNICATION
7.7.8.3 How WPS Works
When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts
as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts
as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a
secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the
WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
109
Chapter 7 Wireless
depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it
sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly.
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a
WPS-enabled access point.
Figure 35 How WPS works
ACTIVATE
WPS
ACTIVATE
WPS
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
WPS HANDSHAKE
ENROLLEE
REGISTRAR
SECURE TUNNEL
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two
minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary.
The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS
transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing
networked devices and the new device.
Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the
enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients.
By default, a WPS devices is “unconfigured”. This means that it is not part of an existing network
and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is
unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a
WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes “configured”. A
configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a
configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS
connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset
it to its factory defaults.
7.7.8.4 Example WPS Network Setup
This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup.
110
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are
unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1
is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security
information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information.
Figure 36 WPS: Example Network Step 1
ENROLLEE
REGISTRAR
SECURITY INFO
AP1
CLIENT 1
In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar
mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must
connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the
registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies
the existing security information to Client 2.
Figure 37 WPS: Example Network Step 2
REGISTRAR
EXISTING CONNECTION
AP1
CLIENT 1
ENROLLEE
YI
RIT
EC
NF
CLIENT 2
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
111
Chapter 7 Wireless
In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you
cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Client
2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead.
Figure 38 WPS: Example Network Step 3
EXISTING CONNECTION
CLIENT 1
CO
ING
XIS
ION
CT
NN
AP1
REGISTRAR
CLIENT 2
SE
CU
RIT
ENROLLEE
INF
AP2
7.7.8.5 Limitations of WPS
WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware.
• WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It
does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP).
• When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices
simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other.
For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by
pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it
successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way.
• WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to
a network you already set up using WPS.
WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared
key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or
WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar
device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you
can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device
must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK).
112
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
• When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button
on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled
device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the
“correct” enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a
possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network.
You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices
simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not
have access to the network. If this happens, open the access point’s configuration interface and
look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the
access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a
rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the
MAC addresses of your wireless clients (usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If
there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
113
Chapter 7 Wireless
114
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Home Networking
8.1 Overview
A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many networking devices
are connected. It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building.
Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses.
LAN
DSL
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the LAN Setup screen to set the LAN IP address, subnet mask, and DHCP settings of your
ZyXEL device (Section 8.2 on page 117).
• Use the Static DHCP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers
based on their MAC Addresses (Section 8.3 on page 119).
• Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP and UPnP NAT traversal on the ZyXEL Device (Section 8.4
on page 121).
• Use the STB Vendor ID screen to have the ZyXEL Device automatically create static DHCP
entries for Set Top Box (STB) devices when they request IP addresses (Section 8.7 on page 129).
• Use the HPNA screen to enable or disable the HPNA port (Section 8.8 on page 130).
• Use the 5th Ethernet Port screen to configure the Ethernet WAN port as a LAN port (Section 8.9
on page 130).
• Use the LAN VLAN screen to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags of traffic sent out
through individual LAN ports (Section 8.10 on page 131).
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
115
Chapter 8 Home Networking
8.1.2 What You Need To Know
8.1.2.1 About LAN
IP Address
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including
computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the
network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.
Subnet Mask
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use
subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
DHCP
A DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server can assign your ZyXEL Device an IP address,
subnet mask, DNS and other routing information when it's turned on.
DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and
vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP
address of a networking device before you can access it.
8.1.2.2 About UPnP
Identifying UPnP Devices
UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP
compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a
UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device.
NAT Traversal
UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP
network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the
network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions.
NAT traversal allows the following:
• Dynamic port mapping
• Learning public IP addresses
• Assigning lease times to mappings
Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP.
See the Chapter 11 on page 159 for more information on NAT.
116
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Home Networking
Cautions with UPnP
The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening
firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also
be obtained and modified by users in some network environments.
When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For
security reasons, the ZyXEL Device allows multicast messages on the LAN only.
All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration.
Disable UPnP if this is not your intention.
UPnP and ZyXEL
ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP™
Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD)
1.0.
See Section 8.5 on page 121 for examples of installing and using UPnP.
Finding Out More
See Section 8.11 on page 132 for technical background information on LANs.
8.1.3 Before You Begin
Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client
List screen.
8.2 The LAN Setup Screen
Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your ZyXEL Device.
Click Network Settings > Home Networking to open the LAN Setup screen.
Follow these steps to configure your LAN settings.
Enter an IP address into the IP Address field. The IP address must be in dotted decimal notation.
This will become the IP address of your ZyXEL Device.
Enter the IP subnet mask into the IP Subnet Mask field. Unless instructed otherwise it is best to
leave this alone, the configurator will automatically compute a subnet mask based upon the IP
address you entered.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
117
Chapter 8 Home Networking
Click Apply to save your settings.
Figure 39 Network Settings > Home Networking > LAN Setup
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 23 Network Settings > Home Networking > LAN Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Group Name
Select the interface group name for which you want to configure LAN settings.
See Chapter 14 on page 189 for how to create a new interface group.
LAN IP Setup
IP Address
Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your ZyXEL Device in dotted
decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default).
Subnet Mask
Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example
255.255.255.0 (factory default). Your ZyXEL Device automatically computes
the subnet mask based on the IP Address you enter, so do not change this field
unless you are instructed to do so.
DHCP Server State
DHCP
Select Enable to have the ZyXEL Device act as a DHCP server or DHCP relay
agent.
Select Disable to stop the DHCP server on the ZyXEL Device.
Select DHCP Relay to have the ZyXEL Device forward DHCP request to the
DHCP server.
118
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Home Networking
Table 23 Network Settings > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DHCP Relay Server
Address
This field is only available when you select DHCP Relay in the DHCP field.
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in this field.
IP Addressing
Values
This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field.
Beginning IP
Address
This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.
Ending IP Address
This field specifies the last of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.
DHCP Server Lease
Time
This is the period of time DHCP-assigned addresses is used. DHCP
automatically assigns IP addresses to clients when they log in. DHCP
centralizes IP address management on central computers that run the DHCP
server program. DHCP leases addresses, for a period of time, which means that
past addresses are “recycled” and made available for future reassignment to
other systems.
Days/Hours/
Minutes
Enter the lease time of the DHCP server.
This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field.
DNS Values
This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field.
DNS
Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS
service provider.
Select Dynamic if you have the Dynamic DNS service.
Select Static if you have the Static DNS service.
DNS Server 1
DNS Server 2
Enter the first and second DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address the
ZyXEL Device passes to the DHCP clients.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
8.3 The Static DHCP Screen
This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on
their MAC Addresses.
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is
assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example,
00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s static DHCP settings. Click Network Settings >
Home Networking > Static DHCP to open the following screen.
Figure 40 Network Settings > Home Networking > Static DHCP
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
119
Chapter 8 Home Networking
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 24 Network Settings > Home Networking > Static DHCP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new static
lease
Click this to add a new static DHCP entry.
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field displays whether the client is connected to the ZyXEL Device.
MAC Address
The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area
Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation).
A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address
that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that
ensures no other adapter has a similar address.
IP Address
This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to have the IP address field editable and change it.
Click the Delete icon to delete a static DHCP entry. A window displays asking
you to confirm that you want to delete the selected entry.
If you click Add new static lease in the Static DHCP screen or the Edit icon next to a static DHCP
entry, the following screen displays.
Figure 41 Static DHCP: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 25 Static DHCP: Add/Edit
120
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
This field displays whether the client is connected to the ZyXEL Device.
Group Name
Select the interface group name for which you want to configure Static DHCP
settings. See Chapter 14 on page 189 for how to create a new interface group.
Select Device Info
If you select Manual Input, you can manually type in the MAC address and IP
address of a computer on your LAN. You can also choose the name of a
computer from the drop list and have the MAC Address and IP Address autodetected.
MAC Address
If you select Manual Input in the Select Device Info field, enter the MAC
address of a computer on your LAN.
IP Address
If you select Manual Input in the Select Device Info field, enter the IP
address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC
address that you will also specify.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Home Networking
Table 25 Static DHCP: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
8.4 The UPnP Screen
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for
simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a
network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network.
In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use.
See page 116 for more information on UPnP.
Use the following screen to enable or disable the UPnP function on your ZyXEL Device. Click
Network Settings > Home Networking > UPnP to display the screen shown next.
Figure 42 Network Settings > Home Networking > UPnP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 26 Network Settings > Home Networking > UPnP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
State
Select Enable to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP
application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the
ZyXEL Device's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access
the web configurator).
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
8.5 Installing UPnP in Windows Example
This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP.
Installing UPnP in Windows Me
Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me.
Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
121
Chapter 8 Home Networking
Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box.
Click Details.
Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication
In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the
Components selection box.
Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components
122
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Home Networking
Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click Next.
Restart the computer when prompted.
Installing UPnP in Windows XP
Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP.
Click Start and Control Panel.
Double-click Network Connections.
In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional
Networking Components ….
Network Connections
The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays. Select Networking
Service in the Components selection box and click Details.
Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
123
Chapter 8 Home Networking
In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box.
Networking Services
Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and
click Next.
8.6 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example
This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP
installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the ZyXEL Device.
Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the ZyXEL Device. Turn on your computer
and the ZyXEL Device.
Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device
124
Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under
Internet Gateway.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Home Networking
Right-click the icon and select Properties.
Network Connections
In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there
were automatically created.
Internet Connection Properties
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
125
Chapter 8 Home Networking
You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings.
Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings
Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add
When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be
deleted automatically.
Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon displays in
the system tray.
System Tray Icon
126
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Home Networking
Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status.
Internet Connection Status
Web Configurator Easy Access
With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the ZyXEL Device without finding out the
IP address of the ZyXEL Device first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the
ZyXEL Device.
Follow the steps below to access the web configurator.
Click Start and then Control Panel.
Double-click Network Connections.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
127
Chapter 8 Home Networking
Select My Network Places under Other Places.
Network Connections
An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network.
Right-click on the icon for your ZyXEL Device and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen
displays.
Network Connections: My Network Places
128
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Home Networking
Right-click on the icon for your ZyXEL Device and select Properties. A properties window displays
with basic information about the ZyXEL Device.
Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example
8.7 The STB Vendor ID Screen
Click Network Settings > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID to open this screen. Set Top
Box (STB) devices with dynamic IP addresses sometimes don’t renew their IP addresses before the
lease time expires. This could lead to IP address conflicts if the STB continues to use an IP address
that gets assigned to another device. Use this screen to list the Vendor IDs of connected STBs to
have the ZyXEL Device automatically create static DHCP entries for them when they request IP
addresses.
Figure 43 Network Settings > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
129
Chapter 8 Home Networking
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 27 Network Settings > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Vendor ID 1 ~ 5
Enter the STB’s vendor ID.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
8.8 The HPNA Screen
Click Network Settings > Home Networking > HPNA to open this screen. Use this screen to
enable or disable the HPNA port. See Chapter 1 on page 23 for more information on HPNA.
Figure 44 Network Settings > Home Networking > HPNA
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 28 Network Settings > Home Networking > HPNA
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
State
Select Enable to activate the HPNA port on the ZyXEL Device.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
8.9 The 5th Ethernet Port Screen
If you are using DSL connection, you can configure your Ethernet WAN port as an extra LAN port.
This fifth Ethernet port provides faster speed since it is a Gigabit port. Click Network Settings >
Home Networking > 5th Ethernet Port to open this screen.
Figure 45 Network Settings > Home Networking > 5th Ethernet Port
130
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Home Networking
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 29 Network Settings > Home Networking > 5th Ethernet Port
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
State
Select Enable to use the Ethernet WAN port as a LAN port on the ZyXEL Device.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
8.10 The LAN VLAN Screen
Click Network Settings > Home Networking > LAN VLAN to open this screen. Use this screen
to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags of traffic sent out through individual LAN
ports.
Figure 46 Network Settings > Home Networking > LAN VLAN
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 30 Network Settings > Home Networking > LAN VLAN
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Lan Port
These represent the ZyXEL Device’s LAN ports.
Tag Operation
Select what you want the ZyXEL Device to do to the IEEE 802.1q VLAN ID and
priority tags of downstream traffic before sending it out through this LAN port.
•
•
•
•
802.1P Mark
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Unchange - Don’t do anything to the traffic’s VLAN ID and priority tags.
Add - Add VLAN ID and priority tags to untagged traffic.
Remove - Delete one tag from tagged traffic. If the frame has double tags,
this removes the outer tag. This does not affect untagged traffic.
Remark - Change the value of the outer VLAN ID and priority tags.
Use this option to set what to do for the IEEE 802.1p priority tags when you add
or remark the tags for a LAN port’s downstream traffic. Either select Unchange
to not modify the traffic’s priority tags or select an priority from 0 to 7 to use. The
larger the number, the higher the priority.
131
Chapter 8 Home Networking
Table 30 Network Settings > Home Networking > LAN VLAN (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
VLAN ID
If you will add or remark tags for this LAN port’s downstream traffic, specify the
VLAN ID (from 0 to 4094) to use here.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
8.11 Technical Reference
This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this
chapter.
8.11.1 LANs, WANs and the ZyXEL Device
The actual physical connection determines whether the ZyXEL Device ports are LAN or WAN ports.
There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN
network as shown next.
Figure 47 LAN and WAN IP Addresses
LAN
WAN
8.11.2 DHCP Setup
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to
obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the ZyXEL Device as a
DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the ZyXEL Device provides the TCP/IP
configuration for the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on
your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured.
IP Pool Setup
The ZyXEL Device is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool).
See the product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP
pool to your LAN computers.
132
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Home Networking
8.11.3 DNS Server Addresses
DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa.
The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a
computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are
passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask.
There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses.
• The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when
you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in
the DHCP Setup screen.
• Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of
IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS
servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The ZyXEL Device
supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature.
Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It
does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If
your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the
DHCP Setup screen.
8.11.4 LAN TCP/IP
The ZyXEL Device has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to
systems that support DHCP client capability.
IP Address and Subnet Mask
Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN
share one common network number.
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your
network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in
selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user
account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this
is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to
192.168.255.0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the ZyXEL
Device. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses
specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's
say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from
192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers
specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that
network.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for
instance, 192.168.1.1, for your ZyXEL Device, but make sure that no other device on your network
is using that IP address.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
133
Chapter 8 Home Networking
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your ZyXEL Device will
compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need
to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do
otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the
Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to
the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has
reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0
• 172.16.0.0
— 10.255.255.255
— 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private
network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP
can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are
part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the
appropriate IP addresses.
Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment,
please refer to RFC 1597, “Address Allocation for Private Internets” and RFC 1466,
“Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space”.
134
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Static Routing
9.1 Overview
The ZyXEL Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the
LAN to the Internet. To have the ZyXEL Device send data to devices not reachable through the
default gateway, use static routes.
For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the ZyXEL Device’s LAN interface.
The ZyXEL Device routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the ZyXEL Device’s default
gateway (R1). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router
R2. You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3
connected to the LAN.
Figure 48 Example of Static Routing Topology
R1
LAN
WAN
R3
R2
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
135
Chapter 9 Static Routing
9.2 The Routing Screen
Use this screen to view and configure the static route rules on the ZyXEL Device. Click Network
Settings > Routing > Static Route to open the following screen.
Figure 49 Network Settings > Routing > Static Route
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 31 Network Settings > Routing > Static Route
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new Static
Route Entry
Click this to configure a new static route.
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field displays whether the static route is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies
that this route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this route is not active.
Name
This is the name that describes or identifies this route.
Destination IP
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is
always based on network number.
Subnet Mask
This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination.
Gateway
This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the
same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps
forward packets to their destinations.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to edit the static route on the ZyXEL Device.
Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the ZyXEL Device. A window
displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route.
136
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Static Routing
9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route
Use this screen to add or edit a static route. Click Add new Static Route Entry in the Routing
screen or the Edit icon next to the static route you want to edit. The screen shown next appears.
Figure 50 Routing: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 32 Routing: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.
Select this to enable the static route. Clear this to disable this static route without
having to delete the entry.
Route Name
Enter a descriptive name for the static route.
Destination IP
Address
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is
always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host,
use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the
network number to be identical to the host ID.
IP Subnet Mask
Enter the IP subnet mask here.
Use Interface
Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent. You must have the WAN
interface(s) already configured in the Broadband screens.
Use Gateway IP
Address
Select this option and enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway
is a router or switch on the same segment as your ZyXEL Device's interface(s).
The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations.
Gateway IP
Address
If you choose Enable in the Use Gateway IP Address field, enter the IP address
of the gateway.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
137
Chapter 9 Static Routing
138
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
10
Quality of Service (QoS)
10.1 Overview
Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network’s ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and
the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is
equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network
performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-ondemand.
Configure QoS on the ZyXEL Device to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network
performance. Setting up QoS involves these steps:
Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows.
Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow.
The ZyXEL Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets
assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is
congestion, allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications
include both those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in
delay) such as Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem
such as Internet radio or streaming video.
This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers.
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The General screen lets you enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth (Section
10.3 on page 141).
• The Queue Setup screen lets you configure QoS queue assignment (Section 10.4 on page 143).
• The Class Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS classifiers (Section 10.5 on page 145).
• The Policer Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS policers (Section 10.5 on page 145).
• The Monitor screen lets you view the ZyXEL Device's QoS-related packet statistics (Section 10.7
on page 152).
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
139
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
10.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
QoS versus Cos
QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given
the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping
similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different
priorities to different packet types.
CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated Services or DS).
IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header, while DiffServ is a new protocol
and defines a new DS field, which replaces the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header.
Tagging and Marking
In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) value,
IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet. When the packet passes
through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide
specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker.
Traffic Shaping
Bursty traffic may cause network congestion. Traffic shaping regulates packets to be transmitted
with a pre-configured data transmission rate using buffers (or queues). Your ZyXEL Device uses the
Token Bucket algorithm to allow a certain amount of large bursts while keeping a limit at the
average rate.
Time
(Before Traffic Shaping)
140
Traffic Rate
Traffic
Traffic
Traffic Rate
Time
(After Traffic Shaping)
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
Traffic Policing
Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the
basis of user-defined criteria. Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user-defined
criteria and identify it as either conforming, exceeding or violating the criteria.
Traffic Rate
Traffic
Traffic
Traffic Rate
Time
(Before Traffic Policing)
Time
(After Traffic Policing)
The ZyXEL Device supports three incoming traffic metering algorithms: Token Bucket Filter (TBF),
Single Rate Two Color Maker (srTCM), and Two Rate Two Color Marker (trTCM). You can specify
actions which are performed on the colored packets. See Section 10.8 on page 153 for more
information on each metering algorithm.
10.3 The Quality of Service General Screen
Click Network Settings > QoS > General to open the screen as shown next.
Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth. See Section 10.1 on
page 139 for more information.
Figure 51 Network Settings > QoS > General
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
141
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 33 Network Settings > QoS > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
QoS
State
Select the Enable check box to turn on QoS to improve your network
performance.
WAN Managed
Upstream
Bandwidth
Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interfaces that you want to
allocate using QoS.
The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interfaces’ actual
transmission speed. For example, set the WAN interfaces’ speed to 100000 kbps
if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps.
You can set this number higher than the interfaces’ actual transmission speed.
The ZyXEL Device uses up to 95% of the DSL port’s actual upstream transmission
speed even if you set this number higher than the DSL port’s actual transmission
speed.
You can also set this number lower than the interfaces’ actual transmission
speed. This will cause the ZyXEL Device to not use some of the interfaces’
available bandwidth.
If you leave this field blank, the ZyXEL Device automatically sets this number to
be 95% of the WAN interfaces’ actual upstream transmission speed.
LAN Managed
Downstream
Bandwidth
Enter the amount of downstream bandwidth for the LAN interfaces (including
HPNA and WLAN) that you want to allocate using QoS.
The recommendation is to set this speed to match the WAN interfaces’ actual
transmission speed. For example, set the LAN managed downstream bandwidth
to 100000 kbps if you use a 100 Mbps wired Ethernet WAN connection.
You can also set this number lower than the WAN interfaces’ actual transmission
speed. This will cause the ZyXEL Device to not use some of the interfaces’
available bandwidth.
If you leave this field blank, the ZyXEL Device automatically sets this to the LAN
interfaces’ maximum supported connection speed.
Upstream traffic priority
Assigned by
Select how the ZyXEL Device assigns priorities to various upstream traffic flows.
•
•
•
•
142
None: Disables auto priority mapping and has the ZyXEL Device put packets
into the queues according to your classification rules. Traffic which does not
match any of the classification rules is mapped into the default queue with the
lowest priority.
Ethernet Priority: Automatically assign priority based on the IEEE 802.1p
priority level.
IP Precedence: Automatically assign priority based on the first three bits of
the TOS field in the IP header.
Packet Length: Automatically assign priority based on the packet size.
Smaller packets get higher priority since control, signaling, VoIP, internet
gaming, or other real-time packets are usually small while larger packets are
usually best effort data packets like file transfers.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
10.4 The Queue Setup Screen
Click Network Settings > QoS > Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next.
Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment.
Figure 52 Network Settings > QoS > Queue Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 34 Network Settings > QoS > Queue Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new
Queue
Click this button to create a new queue entry.
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field displays whether the queue is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that
this queue is active. A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active.
Name
This shows the descriptive name of this queue.
Interface
This shows the name of the ZyXEL Device’s interface through which traffic in this
queue passes.
Priority
This shows the priority of this queue.
Weight
This shows the weight of this queue.
Buffer
Management
This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Queue management algorithms determine how the ZyXEL Device should handle
packets when it receives too many (network congestion).
143
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 34 Network Settings > QoS > Queue Setup (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Rate Limit
This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to edit the queue.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent rules move
up by one when you take this action.
10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue
Click Add new Queue or the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue.
Figure 53 Queue Setup: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 35 Queue Setup: Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Select to enable or disable this queue.
Name
Enter the descriptive name of this queue.
To Interface
Select the interface to which this queue is applied.
This field is read-only if you are editing the queue.
Priority
Select the priority level (from 1 to 3) of this queue.
The smaller the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to higher
priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped
if the network is congested.
Weight
Select the weight (from 1 to 8) of this queue.
If two queues have the same priority level, the ZyXEL Device divides the bandwidth
across the queues according to their weights. Queues with larger weights get more
bandwidth than queues with smaller weights.
144
Buffer
Management
This field displays Drop Tail (DT). Drop Tail (DT) is a simple queue management
algorithm that allows the ZyXEL Device buffer to accept as many packets as it can
until it is full. Once the buffer is full, new packets that arrive are dropped until there
is space in the buffer again (packets are transmitted out of it).
Rate Limit
Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on this queue.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 35 Queue Setup: Add (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
10.5 The Class Setup Screen
Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows
according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number,
destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select
traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow.
You can give different priorities to traffic that the ZyXEL Device forwards out through the WAN
interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low
priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications.
Click Network Settings > QoS > Class Setup to open the following screen.
Figure 54 Network Settings > QoS > Class Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 36 Network Settings > QoS > Class Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new Classifier
Click this to create a new classifier.
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field displays whether the classifier is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies
that this classifier is active. A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not
active.
Class Name
This is the name of the classifier.
Classification
Criteria
This shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the interface from
which traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic
that matches this classifier.
DSCP Mark
This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier.
802.1P Mark
This is the IEEE 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic of this classifier.
VLAN ID Tag
This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
145
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 36 Network Settings > QoS > Class Setup (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
To Queue
This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent
rules move up by one when you take this action.
146
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class
Click Add new Classifier in the Class Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a classifier to open
the following screen.
Figure 55 Class Setup: Add/Edit
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
147
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 37 Class Setup: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Select this to enable this classifier.
Class Name
Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard characters, not
including spaces.
Classification Order
Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the
classifier to the number you selected after clicking Apply.
Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list.
From Interface
If you want to classify the traffic by an ingress interface, select an interface
from the From Interface drop-down list box.
To Interface
If you want to classify the traffic by an egress interface, select an interface
from the To Interface drop-down list box.
Ether Type
Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic.
If you select IP, you also need to configure source or destination MAC address,
IP address, DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type.
If you select 802.1Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level.
Source
Address
Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal
notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address.
Subnet
Netmask
Enter the source subnet mask.
Port Range
If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and
enter the port number(s) of the source.
MAC
Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet.
MAC Mask
Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a
packet’s MAC address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC
address should match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC
address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set
the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a
packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.
Exclude
Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from
this classifier.
Destination
Address
Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal
notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address.
Subnet
Netmask
Enter the source subnet mask.
Port Range
If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and
enter the port number(s) of the source.
MAC
Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet.
MAC Mask
Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a
packet’s MAC address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC
address should match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC
address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set
the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a
packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.
148
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 37 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL
Exclude
DESCRIPTION
Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from
this classifier.
Others
Service
This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
This field simplifies classifier configuration by allowing you to select a
predefined application. When you select a predefined application, you do not
configure the rest of the filter fields.
IP Protocol
This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP, UDP, ICMP
or IGMP. If you select User defined, enter the protocol (service type)
number.
DHCP
This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and select a DHCP option.
If you select Vendor Class ID (DHCP Option 60), enter the Vendor Class
Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware
or firmware.
If you select User Class ID (DHCP Option 77), enter a string that identifies
the user’s category or application type in the matched DHCP packets.
Packet Length
This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from
46 to 1500) in the fields provided.
DSCP
This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0
and 63 in the field provided.
802.1P
This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the dropdown list box.
"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.
VLAN ID
This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number.
TCP ACK
This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK
(Acknowledge) flag.
Exclude
DSCP Mark
Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from
this classifier.
This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
If you select Mark, enter a DSCP value with which the ZyXEL Device replaces
the DSCP field in the packets.
If you select Unchange, the ZyXEL Device keep the DSCP field in the packets.
802.1P Mark
Select a priority level with which the ZyXEL Device replaces the IEEE 802.1p
priority field in the packets.
If you select Unchange, the ZyXEL Device keep the 802.1p priority field in the
packets.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
149
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 37 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
VLAN ID
If you select Remark, enter a VLAN ID number with which the ZyXEL Device
replaces the VLAN ID of the frames.
If you select Remove, the ZyXEL Device deletes the VLAN ID of the frames
before forwarding them out.
If you select Add, the ZyXEL Device treat all matched traffic untagged and add
a second VLAN ID.
If you select Unchange, the ZyXEL Device keep the VLAN ID in the packets.
To Queue Index
Select a queue that applies to this class.
You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
10.6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen
Use this screen to configure QoS policers that allow you to limit the transmission rate of incoming
traffic. Click Network Settings > QoS > Policer Setup. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 56 Network Settings > QoS > Policer Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 38 Network Settings > QoS > Policer Setup
150
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new Policer
Click this to create a new entry.
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field displays whether the policer is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies
that this policer is active. A gray bulb signifies that this policer is not active.
Name
This field displays the descriptive name of this policer.
Regulated Classes
This field displays the name of a QoS classifier
Meter Type
This field displays the type of QoS metering algorithm used in this policer.
Rule
These are the rates and burst sizes against which the policer checks the traffic
of the member QoS classes.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 38 Network Settings > QoS > Policer Setup (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Action
This shows the how the policer has the ZyXEL Device treat different types of
traffic belonging to the policer’s member QoS classes.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to edit the policer.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing policer. Note that subsequent rules
move up by one when you take this action.
10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer
Click Add new Officer in the Policer Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a policer to show the
following screen.
Figure 57 Policer Setup: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 39 Policer Setup: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Select the check box to activate this policer.
Name
Enter the descriptive name of this policer.
Meter Type
Select how the policer shapes the traffic of the member QoS classes.
The Simple Token Bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when
traffic can be transmitted. Each token represents one byte. The algorithm allows
bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size.
The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM) is based on the token bucket filter
and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate
(CIR), the Committed Burst Size (CBS) and the Excess Burst Size (EBS).
The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM) is based on the token bucket filter
and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR)
and the Peak Information Rate (PIR).
Committed
Rate
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Specify the committed rate. When the incoming traffic rate of the member QoS
classes is less than the committed rate, the device applies the conforming action to
the traffic.
151
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 39 Policer Setup: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Committed
Burst Size
Specify the committed burst size for packet bursts. This must be equal to or less
than the peak burst size (two rate three color) or excess burst size (single rate
three color) if it is also configured.
This is the maximum size of the (first) token bucket in a traffic metering algorithm.
Conforming
Action
Specify what the ZyXEL Device does for packets within the committed rate and
burst size (green-marked packets).
•
•
NonConforming
Action
Available Class
Selected Class
Pass: Send the packets without modification.
DSCP Mark: Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark
value to use.
Specify what the ZyXEL Device does for packets that exceed the excess burst size
or peak rate and burst size (red-marked packets).
•
•
Drop: Discard the packets.
DSCP Mark: Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark
value to use. The packets may be dropped if there is congestion on the network.
Select a QoS classifier to apply this QoS policer to traffic that matches the QoS
classifier.
Highlight a QoS classifier in the Available Class box and use the > button to move
it to the Selected Class box.
To remove a QoS classifier from the Selected Class box, select it and use the <
button.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
10.7 The QoS Monitor Screen
To view the ZyXEL Device’s QoS packet statistics, click Network Settings > QoS > Monitor. The
screen appears as shown.
Figure 58 Network Settings > QoS > Monitor
152
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 40 Network Settings > QoS > Monitor
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval
Enter how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen. Select
None to stop refreshing statistics.
Interface Monitor
This is the index number of the entry.
Name
This shows the name of the interface on the ZyXEL Device.
Pass Rate
This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are transmitted
successfully.
Drop Rate
This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are dropped.
Queue Monitor
This is the index number of the entry.
Name
This shows the name of the queue.
Pass Rate
This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are transmitted
successfully.
Drop Rate
This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are dropped.
10.8 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the ZyXEL Device features
described in this chapter.
IEEE 802.1Q Tag
The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN
membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user
priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that
devices need to process the frame across the network.
IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The
following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates
the 802.1p).
Table 41 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type
PRIORITY
LEVEL
TRAFFIC TYPE
Level 7
Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages.
Level 6
Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the
variations in delay).
Level 5
Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter.
Level 4
Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems
Network Architecture) transactions.
Level 3
Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include
important business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
Level 2
This is for “spare bandwidth”.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
153
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 41 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type (continued)
PRIORITY
LEVEL
TRAFFIC TYPE
Level 1
This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that
are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.
Level 0
Typically used for best-effort traffic.
DiffServ
QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are given the
same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet
types.
DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they
receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on
the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs)
indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network
devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to
negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have
to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.
DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services (DS) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field
in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define
up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field.
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ
compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.
DSCP (6 bits)
Unused (2 bits)
The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet
gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be
marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP
values and the configured policies.
IP Precedence
Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a
layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP
header. There are eight classes of services (ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is
the lowest priority level and seven is the highest.
Automatic Priority Queue Assignment
If you enable QoS on the ZyXEL Device, the ZyXEL Device can automatically base on the IEEE
802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not
match a class.
154
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the ZyXEL Device.
On the ZyXEL Device, traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in
lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested.
Table 42 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping
LAYER 2
LAYER 3
PRIORITY
QUEUE
IEEE 802.1P USER
PRIORITY
(ETHERNET
PRIORITY)
TOS (IP
PRECEDENCE)
DSCP
000000
000000
>1100
001110
250~1100
IP PACKET
LENGTH (BYTE)
001100
001010
001000
010110
010100
010010
010000
011110
<250
011100
011010
011000
100110
100100
100010
100000
101110
101000
110000
111000
Token Bucket
The token bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. The
bucket stores tokens, each of which represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b
bytes which is also the bucket size, so the bucket can hold up to b tokens. Tokens are generated
and added into the bucket at a constant rate. The following shows how tokens work with packets:
• A packet can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the bucket is equal to or greater than the
size of the packet (in bytes).
• After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed
from the bucket.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
155
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
• If there are no tokens in the bucket, the ZyXEL Device stops transmitting until enough tokens are
generated.
• If not enough tokens are available, the ZyXEL Device treats the packet in either one of the
following ways:
In traffic shaping:
• Holds it in the queue until enough tokens are available in the bucket.
In traffic policing:
• Drops it.
• Transmits it but adds a DSCP mark. The ZyXEL Device may drop these marked packets if the
network is overloaded.
Configure the bucket size to be equal to or less than the amount of the bandwidth that the interface
can support. It does not help if you set it to a bucket size over the interface’s capability. The smaller
the bucket size, the lower the data transmission rate and that may cause outgoing packets to be
dropped. A larger transmission rate requires a big bucket size. For example, use a bucket size of 10
kbytes to get the transmission rate up to 10 Mbps.
Single Rate Three Color Marker
The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM, defined in RFC 2697) is a type of traffic policing that
identifies packets by comparing them to one user-defined rate, the Committed Information Rate
(CIR), and two burst sizes: the Committed Burst Size (CBS) and Excess Burst Size (EBS).
The srTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to
packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to
as yellow and low is referred to as green.
The srTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (CBS and EBS). Tokens
are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate, called Committed Information Rate
(CIR). When the first bucket (CBS) is full, new tokens overflow into the second bucket (EBS).
All packets are evaluated against the CBS. If a packet does not exceed the CBS it is marked green.
Otherwise it is evaluated against the EBS. If it is below the EBS then it is marked yellow. If it
exceeds the EBS then it is marked red.
The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in srTCM:
• A packet arrives. The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in
the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes).
• After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed
from the CBS bucket.
• If there are not enough tokens in the CBS bucket, the ZyXEL Device checks the EBS bucket. The
packet is marked yellow if there are sufficient tokens in the EBS bucket. Otherwise, the packet is
marked red. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped.
Two Rate Three Color Marker
The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM, defined in RFC 2698) is a type of traffic policing that
identifies packets by comparing them to two user-defined rates: the Committed Information Rate
(CIR) and the Peak Information Rate (PIR). The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are
admitted to the network. The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR. CIR and PIR values are based
156
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider
and client.
The trTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to
packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to
as yellow and low is referred to as green.
The trTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (Committed Burst Size
(CBS) and Peak Burst Size (PBS)). Tokens are generated and added into the two buckets at the CIR
and PIR respectively.
All packets are evaluated against the PIR. If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red. Otherwise it
is evaluated against the CIR. If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow. Finally, if it is below the
CIR then it is marked green.
The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in trTCM:
• A packet arrives. If the number of tokens in the PBS bucket is less than the size of the packet (in
bytes), the packet is marked red and may be dropped regardless of the CBS bucket. No tokens
are removed if the packet is dropped.
• If the PBS bucket has enough tokens, the ZyXEL Device checks the CBS bucket. The packet is
marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or
greater than the size of the packet (in bytes). Otherwise, the packet is marked yellow.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
157
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
158
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
11
Network Address Translation (NAT)
11.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the ZyXEL Device. NAT (Network Address
Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example,
the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known
within another network.
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the Port Forwarding screen to configure forward incoming service requests to the server(s)
on your local network (Section 11.2 on page 160).
• Use the Applications screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local
network (Section 11.3 on page 163).
• Use the Port Triggering screen to add and configure the ZyXEL Device’s trigger port settings
(Section 11.4 on page 164).
• Use the DMZ screen to configure a default server (Section 11.5 on page 167).
• Use the ALG screen to enable and disable the SIP (VoIP) ALG in the ZyXEL Device (Section 11.6
on page 168).
• Use the Sessions screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions all clients can use
(Section 11.7 on page 169).
11.1.2 What You Need To Know
Inside/Outside
Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ZyXEL Device, for example, the
computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the
outside hosts.
Global/Local
Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for
example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local
network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is
traveling in the WAN side.
NAT
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
159
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside
global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host.
Port Forwarding
A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP,
that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network
appear as a single computer to the outside world.
Finding Out More
See Section 11.8 on page 169 for advanced technical information on NAT.
11.2 The Port Forwarding Screen
Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your
local network.
You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP
address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can
support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to
specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or
a range of ports.
The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix E on page 333. Please refer
to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers.
Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server
processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may
periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any
active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.
Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example)
Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example),
port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a
160
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address.
The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.
Figure 59 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example
A=192.168.1.33
LAN
WAN
B=192.168.1.34
192.168.1.1
IP Address assigned by ISP
C=192.168.1.3
D=192.168.1.36
Click Network Settings > NAT > Port Forwarding to open the following screen.
See Appendix E on page 333 for port numbers commonly used for particular services.
Figure 60 Network Settings > NAT > Port Forwarding
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 43 Network Settings > NAT > Port Forwarding
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new rule
Click this to add a new rule.
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field displays whether the NAT rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies
that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.
Service Name
This shows the service’s name.
WAN Interface
This shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
External Start
Port
This is the first external port number that identifies a service.
External End Port
This is the last external port number that identifies a service.
Internal Start
Port
This is the first internal port number that identifies a service.
Internal End Port
This is the last internal port number that identifies a service.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
161
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Table 43 Network Settings > NAT > Port Forwarding (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Server IP Address This is the server’s IP address.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to edit this rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
11.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding
Click Add new rule in the Port Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to
open the following screen.
Figure 61 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 44 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.
This field is read-only in the Port Forwarding Configuration screen.
Service Name
Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so
on).
This field is read-only in the Port Forwarding Edit screen.
WAN Interface
Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled.
External Start
Port
Enter the original destination port for the packets.
To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the External End Port
field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port
number in the External End Port field.
162
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Table 44 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
External End
Port
Enter the last port of the original destination port range.
To forward only one port, enter the port number in the External Start Port field
above and then enter it again in this field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins
with the port number in the External Start Port field above.
Internal Start
Port
This shows the port number to which you want the ZyXEL Device to translate the
incoming port. For a range of ports, enter the first number of the range to which
you want the incoming ports translated.
Internal End Port
This shows the last port of the translated port range.
Server IP
Address
Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here.
Protocol
Select the protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are TCP, UDP, or
TCP/UDP.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
11.3 The Applications Screen
This screen provides a summary of all NAT applications and their configuration. In addition, this
screen allows you to create new applications and/or remove existing ones.
To access this screen, click Network Settings > NAT > Applications. The following screen
appears.
Figure 62 Network Settings > NAT > Applications
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 45 Network Settings > NAT > Applications
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new
application
Click this to add a new NAT application rule.
Application
Forwarded
This field shows the type of application that the service forwards.
WAN Interface
This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
Server IP
Address
This field displays the destination IP address for the service.
Modify
Click the Delete icon to delete the rule.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
163
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
11.3.1 Add New Application
This screen lets you create new NAT application rules. Click Add new application in the
Applications screen to open the following screen.
Figure 63 Applications: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 46 Applications: Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WAN Interface
Select the WAN interface that you want to apply this NAT rule to.
Server IP
Address
Enter the inside IP address of the application here.
Application
Category
Select the category of the application from the drop-down list box.
Application
Forwarded
Select a service from the drop-down list box and the ZyXEL Device automatically
configures the protocol, start, end, and map port number that define the service.
View Rule
Click this to display the configuration of the service that you have chosen in
Application Fowarded.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
11.4 The Port Triggering Screen
Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on
the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service
(coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN).
The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to
use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN
computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address.
Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take
turns using the service. The ZyXEL Device records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends
traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port).
When the ZyXEL Device's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol
("open" port), the ZyXEL Device forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that
sent the request. After that computer’s connection for that service closes, another computer on the
164
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
LAN can use the service in the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP
address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application.
For example:
Figure 64 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example
Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070).
Port 7070 is a “trigger” port and causes the ZyXEL Device to record Jane’s computer IP address.
The ZyXEL Device associates Jane's computer IP address with the "open" port range of 6970-7170.
The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170.
The ZyXEL Device forwards the traffic to Jane’s computer IP address.
Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The
ZyXEL Device times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol) or two hours with
TCP/IP (Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol).
Click Network Settings > NAT > Port Triggering to open the following screen. Use this screen
to view your ZyXEL Device’s trigger port settings.
Figure 65 Network Settings > NAT > Port Triggering
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 47 Network Settings > NAT > Port Triggering
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new rule
Click this to create a new rule.
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field displays whether the port triggering rule is active or not. A yellow bulb
signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.
Service Name
This field displays the name of the service used by this rule.
WAN Interface
This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
165
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Table 47 Network Settings > NAT > Port Triggering (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Trigger Port
The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the ZyXEL
Device to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a
server on the WAN.
Start
This is the first port number that identifies a service.
End
This is the last port number that identifies a service.
Trigger Proto.
This is the trigger transport layer protocol.
Open
The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when
it sends out a particular service. The ZyXEL Device forwards the traffic with this
port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the
service.
Start
End
This is the first port number that identifies a service.
This is the last port number that identifies a service.
Open Proto.
This is the open transport layer protocol.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to edit this rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
11.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule
This screen lets you create new port triggering rules. Click Add new rule in the Port Triggering
screen or click a rule’s Edit icon to open the following screen.
Figure 66 Port Triggering: Add/Edit
166
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 48 Port Triggering: Configuration Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Select the check box to enable this rule.
This field is read-only in the Port Triggering Configuration screen.
Service Name
Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so
on).
This field is read-only in the Port Triggering Edit screen.
WAN Interface
Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port triggering rules.
Trigger Start Port The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the ZyXEL
Device to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a
server on the WAN.
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
Trigger End Port
Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Trigger Protocol
Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP.
Open Start Port
The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when
it sends out a particular service. The ZyXEL Device forwards the traffic with this
port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the
service.
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
Open End Port
Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Open Protocol
Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
11.5 The DMZ Screen
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default
server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding Setup
screen.
Figure 67 Network Settings > NAT > DMZ
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
167
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 49 Network Settings > NAT > DMZ
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Default Server
Address
Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that
are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen.
Note: If you do not assign a Default Server Address, the ZyXEL Device discards
all packets received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port
Forwarding screen.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
11.6 The ALG Screen
Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). A SIP ALG allows SIP calls
to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream.
When the ZyXEL Device registers with the SIP register server, the SIP ALG translates the ZyXEL
Device’s private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to
use STUN or an outbound proxy if your ZyXEL Device is behind a SIP ALG.
Use this screen to enable and disable the SIP (VoIP) ALG in the ZyXEL Device. To access this
screen, click Network Settings > NAT > ALG.
Figure 68 Network Settings > NAT > ALG
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 50 Network Settings > NAT > ALG
168
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ALG
Enable this to make sure applications such as FTP and file transfer in IM
applications work correctly with port-forwarding and address-mapping rules.
SIP ALG
Enable this to make sure SIP (VoIP) works correctly with port-forwarding and
address-mapping rules.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
11.7 The Sessions Screen
Use the Sessions screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions all clients can use.
Click Network Settings > NAT > Sessions to display the following screen.
Figure 69 Network Settings > NAT > Sessions
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 51 Network Settings > NAT > Sessions
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
MAX NAT Session
per Host
Use this field to set a common limit to the number of concurrent NAT sessions all
client computers can have.
If only a few clients use peer to peer applications, you can raise this number to
improve their performance. With heavy peer to peer application use, lower this
number to ensure no single client uses too many of the available NAT sessions.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
11.8 Technical Reference
This part contains more information regarding NAT.
11.8.1 NAT Definitions
Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ZyXEL Device, for example, the
computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the
outside hosts.
Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for
example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local
network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is
traveling in the WAN side.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
169
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address
of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in
a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP
address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table
summarizes this information.
Table 52 NAT Definitions
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Inside
This refers to the host on the LAN.
Outside
This refers to the host on the WAN.
Local
This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the
LAN.
Global
This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the
WAN.
NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host.
11.8.2 What NAT Does
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the
WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside
global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note
that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed.
The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP.
In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local
network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Manyto-One and Many-to-Many Overload mapping), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall
protection. With no servers defined, your ZyXEL Device filters out all incoming inquiries, thus
preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation,
refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT).
170
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
11.8.3 How NAT Works
Each packet has two addresses – a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets,
the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global
Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination
address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local)
IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It
replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and
Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The
ZyXEL Device keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can
have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this.
Figure 70 How NAT Works
NAT Table
LAN
Inside Local
IP Address
192.168.1.10
192.168.1.11
192.168.1.12
192.168.1.13
192.168.1.13
192.168.1.12
SA
SA
192.168.1.10
IGA1
Inside Local
Address (ILA)
192.168.1.11
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Inside Global
IP Address
IGA 1
IGA 2
IGA 3
IGA 4
WAN
Inside Global
Address (IGA)
192.168.1.10
171
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
11.8.4 NAT Application
The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs (logical LANs
using IP alias) behind the ZyXEL Device can communicate with three distinct WAN networks.
Figure 71 NAT Application With IP Alias
Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer to RFC 1700 for
further information about port numbers. Please also refer to the Supporting CD for more examples
and details on port forwarding and NAT.
Table 53 Services and Port Numbers
172
SERVICES
PORT NUMBER
ECHO
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
21
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
25
DNS (Domain Name System)
53
Finger
79
HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web)
80
POP3 (Post Office Protocol)
110
NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol)
119
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
161
SNMP trap
162
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
1723
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Port Forwarding Example
Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example),
port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a
third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address.
The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.
Figure 72 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example
A=192.168.1.33
192.168.1.1
B=192.168.1.34
IP address assigned by ISP
C=192.168.1.35
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
D=192.168.1.36
173
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
174
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
12
Dynamic DNS Setup
12.1 Overview
DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and
vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP
address of a machine before you can access it.
In addition to the system DNS server(s), each WAN interface (service) is set to have its own static
or dynamic DNS server list. You can configure a DNS static route to forward DNS queries for certain
domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server(s). The ZyXEL Device uses a
system DNS server (in the order you specify in the Broadband screen) to resolve domain names
that do not match any DNS routing entry. After the ZyXEL Device receives a DNS reply from a DNS
server, it creates a new entry for the resolved IP address in the routing table.
In the following example, the DNS server 168.92.5.1 obtained from the WAN interface eth10.0 is
set to be the system DNS server. The DNS server 10.10.23.7 is obtained from the WAN interface
VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1. You configure a DNS route for *example.com to have the ZyXEL Device forward
DNS requests for the domain name mail.example.com through the WAN interface VDSL_PoE/
ppp0.1 to the DNS server 10.10.23.7.
Figure 73 Example of DNS Routing Topology
LAN
WAN
eth10.0
DNS:168.92.5.1
(Default)
sip.service.com
VDSL_PPoE/ppp0.1
mail.example.com
DNS:10.10.23.7
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
175
Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup
Dynamic DNS
Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic
DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access
your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance
myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an
IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to
call you even if they don't know your IP address.
First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for
people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name.
The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key.
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the DNS Entry screen to view, configure, or remove DNS routes (Section 12.2 on page
176).
• Use the Dynamic DNS screen to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the ZyXEL
Device (Section 12.3 on page 178).
12.1.2 What You Need To Know
DYNDNS Wildcard
Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same
IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example,
www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname.
If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS.
12.2 The DNS Entry Screen
Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the ZyXEL Device. Click Advanced > DNS
Setting to open the DNS Entry screen.
Figure 74 Advanced > DNS Setting > DNS Setting
176
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 54 Advanced > DNS Setting > DNS Setting
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new DNS
entry
Click this to create a new DNS entry.
This is the index number of the entry.
Hostname
This indicates the host name or domain name.
IP Address
This indicates the IP address assigned to this computer.
Source
This indicates the source of the IP address.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to edit the rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
12.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry
You can manually add or edit the ZyXEL Device’s DNS name and IP address entry. Click Add new
DNS entry in the DNS Entry screen or the Edit icon next to the entry you want to edit. The screen
shown next appears.
Figure 75 DNS Entry: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 55 DNS Entry: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Host Name
Enter the host name of the DNS entry.
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the DNS entry.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
177
Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup
12.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen
Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s DDNS. Click Advanced > DNS Setting > Dynamic
DNS. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 76 Advanced > DNS Setting > Dynamic DNS
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 56 Advanced > DNS Setting > Dynamic DNS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Dynamic DNS
Select this check box to use dynamic DNS.
Service Provider
Select your Dynamic DNS service provider from the drop-down list box.
Hostname
Type the domain name assigned to your ZyXEL Device by your Dynamic DNS
provider.
You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (",").
178
User Name
Type your user name.
Password
Type the password assigned to you.
Email
If you select TZO in the Service Provider field, enter the user name you used to
register for this service.
Key
If you select TZO in the Service Provider field, enter the password you used to
register for this service.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
13
IGMP
13.1 Overview
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender to 1 recipient)
or Broadcast (1 sender to everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group
of hosts on the network.
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership
in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. See RFC 1112, RFC 2236, and RFC 3376 for
information on IGMP versions 1, 2, and 3 respectively.
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the General screen to configure general IGMP proxy and IGMP packet processing settings
(Section 13.2 on page 181).
• Use the IGMP Filter screens to control IGMP access (Section 13.3 on page 182).
• Use the IGMP ACL screens to block or allow access to specific multicast media channels (Section
13.4 on page 186).
13.1.2 What You Need to Know
IP Multicast Addresses
In IPv4, a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts (multicast
group) in a different sub-network. A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group, not
individual receiving devices. IP addresses in the Class D range (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255) are
used for IP multicasting. Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes
(see the IANA web site for more information).
IGMP Snooping
A layer-2 switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query, Report and Leave (IGMP version 2) packets
transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast
group membership. It checks IGMP packets passing through it, picks out the group registration
information, and configures multicasting accordingly. IGMP snooping allows the ZyXEL Device to
learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them.
The ZyXEL Device forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups (that it has learned from
IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured) to ports that are members of that group. The
ZyXEL Device discards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it does not know. IGMP
snooping generates no additional network traffic, allowing you to significantly reduce multicast
traffic passing through your device.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
179
Chapter 13 IGMP
IGMP Proxy
To allow better network performance, you can use IGMP proxy instead of a multicast routing
protocol in a simple tree network topology.
Note: Your ZyXEL Device is an IGMP proxy.
In IGMP proxy, an upstream interface is the port that is closer to the source (or the root of the
multicast tree) and is able to receive multicast traffic. There should only be one upstream interface
(also known as the query port) for one query VLAN on the ZyXEL Device. A downstream interface is
a port that connects to a host (such as a computer).
The following figure shows a network example where A is the multicast source while computers 1, 2
and 3 are the receivers. In the figure A is connected to the upstream interface and 1, 2 and 3 are
connected to the downstream interface.
Figure 77 IGMP Proxy Network Example
Multicast
Server
Proxy
Hosts
The ZyXEL Device will not respond to IGMP join and leave messages on the upstream interface. The
ZyXEL Device only responds to IGMP query messages on the upstream interface. The ZyXEL Device
sends IGMP query messages to the hosts that are members of the query VLAN.
The ZyXEL Device only sends an IGMP leave message via the upstream interface when the last host
leaves a multicast group.
Router Alert Option
The router alert option provides a way to let routers intercept packets not addressed to them
directly, without incurring any significant performance penalty. The router alert option in the IP
header of an IGMP control packet tells the router to examine the packet more closely for routing
information. Regular data packets do not receive the extra checking and are forwarded with little or
no performance penalty. IGMP v2 and IGMP v3 both require the router alert option while IGMP v1
does not use it at all. See RFC 2113 for more information.
180
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 13 IGMP
13.2 The IGMP General Screen
Use the General screen to configure general IGMP proxy and IGMP packet processing settings.
Click Network Settings > IGMP Setting > General to open the following screen.
Figure 78 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > General
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 57 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IGMP Proxy State
Query Interval
Specify how many seconds since the last query the ZyXEL Device waits before
it queries all directly connected networks to gather multicast group
membership.
Query Response
Interval
Specify how many seconds the host allots for gathering membership
information from directly connected networks before it sends a report.
Robustness Value
This is the number of times the host sends a report to the ZyXEL Device when
the ZyXEL Device queries for the host’s status.
IGMP Packet
Process
Select one or more of these fields to increase the IGMP network’s security or
control which types of IGMP packets the ZyXEL Device forwards.
Ignore IGMP
packets not from
LAN subnet
Select this to discard IGMP packets from IP addresses other than the LAN
subnet.
Ignore IGMP report
without router alert
option
Select this to discard IGMP report packets that do not include a router alert
option.
Ignore IGMP leave
without router alert
option
Select this to discard IGMP leave packets that do not include a router alert
option.
Ignore IGMP query
without router alert
option
Select this to discard IGMP query packets that do not include a router alert
option.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
181
Chapter 13 IGMP
Table 57 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > General (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Ignore IGMP query
which destination
IP is not 224.0.0.1
Select this to discard IGMP query packets with a destination IP address other
than 224.0.0.1, the all-hosts multicast address.
Apply
Click this button to save your settings back to the ZyXEL Device.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
13.3 IGMP Filter Configuration
Use this screen to control IGMP access. Click Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter
to open the following screen.
Figure 79 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter
182
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 13 IGMP
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 58 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Allow IGMP packets
from Ethernet
interface
Select this to accept IGMP packets received on any of the LAN Ethernet ports.
Clear this to discard IGMP packets received on any of the LAN Ethernet ports.
Allow IGMP packets
from WiFi interface
Select this to accept IGMP packets received through the wireless LAN interface.
Clear this to discard IGMP packets received through the wireless LAN interface.
Allow IGMP packets
from Ethernet LAN
port1 ~ 4
Select specific LAN Ethernet ports upon which to accept IGMP packets. Clear
individual LAN Ethernet port options to discard IGMP packets received on those
ports.
LAN Host
This table lists the LAN computers the ZyXEL Device has detected.
LAN Host IP
This is the IP address of a computer on the ZyXEL Device’s LAN.
Type
This shows whether or not the LAN device is a Set Top Box (STB).
IGMP Enabled
This shows whether or not the LAN device is allowed to access IGMP services
through the ZyXEL Device.
Max Allowed
Channel
This is how many IGMP channels the LAN device is allowed to subscribe to.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to change the entry.
Multicast Service
Use this section to limit access to IGMP multicast service domains.
Add a new service
Click this to add a new IGMP multicast service domain.
Service Name
This is the name of an IGMP multicast service domain.
Multicast Group
This is the multicast address and subnet that the service domain uses.
STB Max Channels
This is to how many of the service domain’s IGMP channels a LAN STB device is
allowed to subscribe.
Non-STB Max
Channels
This is to how many of the service domain’s IGMP channels LAN devices other
than STBs are allowed to subscribe.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to change the entry.
Click the Delete icon to delete the entry.
Add a new host
limitation
Click this to limit a LAN host’s IGMP access.
Service Name
This is the name of an IGMP multicast service domain.
LAN IP
This is the IP address of a computer on the ZyXEL Device’s LAN.
IGMP Enabled
This shows whether or not the LAN device using the specified IP address is
allowed to use the IGMP multicast service domain.
Max Allowed
Channel
This shows to how many of the IGMP multicast service domain’s channels the
LAN device using the specified IP address can subscribe.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to change the entry.
Click the Delete icon to delete the entry.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
183
Chapter 13 IGMP
13.3.1 IGMP Host Limitation Edit
Use this screen to control a LAN host’s access to IGMP services through the ZyXEL Device. Click
Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter and then a LAN host’s Edit icon to open the
following screen.
Figure 80 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > LAN Host Edit
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 59 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > LAN Host Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
LAN Host
This is the IP address of one of the ZyXEL Device’s LAN hosts.
IGMP Enabled
Select whether or not the LAN device using the specified IP address is allowed
to access IGMP services through the ZyXEL Device.
Max Allowed
Channels
Specify to how many IGMP channels the LAN device is allowed to subscribe.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
13.3.2 IGMP Service Add
Use this screen to add or edit an IGMP multicast service domain. Click Network Settings > IGMP
Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new rule to open the following screen.
Figure 81 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new service
184
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 13 IGMP
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 60 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new service
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Service Name
Specify a name to identify the IGMP service domain. You can enter up to 30
characters. You can use letters, numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_).
Spaces are not allowed.
Maximum active
channels for STB
Specify to how many of the service domain’s IGMP channels a LAN STB device
is allowed to subscribe.
Maximum active
channels for NonSTB
Specify to how many of the service domain’s IGMP channels LAN devices other
than STBs are is allowed to subscribe.
Group List
Use this section to specify the multicast groups and subnet masks for this IGMP
service domain.
Add a group
Click this to add a multicast group and subnet mask to this IGMP service
domain.
Group
This column lists the multicast groups and subnet masks for this IGMP service
domain.
Modify
Click the Delete icon to delete the entry.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
13.3.3 IGMP Host Limitation Add
Use this screen to control a LAN host’s access to an IGMP multicast service domain. Click Network
Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new host limitation to open the following
screen.
Figure 82 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new host limitation
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 61 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new host limitation
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Service
Specify the name of the IGMP multicast service domain to which you want to
block or allow access.
LAN Host
Select the IP address of one of the ZyXEL Device’s LAN hosts.
IGMP Enabled
Select whether or not the LAN device using the specified IP address is allowed
to use the IGMP multicast service domain.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
185
Chapter 13 IGMP
Table 61 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new host limitation (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Max Allowed
Channels
This shows to how many of the IGMP multicast service domain’s channels the
LAN device using the specified IP address can subscribe.
IGMP Enabled
Select whether or not the LAN device is allowed to access IGMP services
through the ZyXEL Device.
Max Allowed
Channels
Specify to how many IGMP channels the LAN device is allowed to subscribe.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
13.4 IGMP ACL Configuration
Use the IGMP Access Control List (ACL) to block or allow access to specific multicast media
channels. Click Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL to open the following screen.
Figure 83 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 62 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IGMP ACL List
Select Black List to block access to specific multicast channels and allow
access to other multicast channels.
Select White List to allow access to only specific multicast channels and block
access to other multicast channels.
Select Disabled to have the ZyXEL Device not restrict which multicast
channels the multimedia devices on the LAN can access.
186
Add a new rule
Click this to create a new IGMP ACL rule.
White List
These rules are for allowing access to specified multicast IP addresses.
Multicast Address
This is the multicast IP address of a multicast media channel to which you want
to allow access.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 13 IGMP
Table 62 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Multicast Address
Mask
This is the subnet mask of the multicast IP address.
Black List
These rules are for blocking access to specific multicast IP addresses.
Multicast Address
This is the multicast IP address of a multicast media channel to which you want
to block access.
Multicast Address
Mask
This is the subnet mask of the multicast IP address.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to change the entry.
Click the Delete icon to delete the entry.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
13.4.1 IGMP ACL Add
Use this screen to configure the multicast IP address of a multicast media channel to which you
want to block or allow access. Click Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL > Add a
new rule to open the following screen.
Figure 84 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL > Add a new rule
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 63 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL > Add a new rule
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Multicast IP
Address
Enter the multicast IP address of a multicast media channel to which you want
to block or allow access.
Multicast IP Mask
Enter the subnet mask of the multicast IP address.
Type
Select Black List to have this entry block access to the specified multicast IP
address.
Select White List to have this entry allow access to the specified multicast IP
address.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
187
Chapter 13 IGMP
188
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
14
Interface Group
14.1 Overview
By default, all LAN and WAN interfaces on the ZyXEL Device are in the same group and can
communicate with each other. Create interface groups to have the ZyXEL Device assign the IP
addresses in different domains to different groups. Each group acts as an independent network on
the ZyXEL Device. This lets devices connected to an interface group’s LAN interfaces communicate
through the interface group’s WAN or LAN interfaces but not other WAN or LAN interfaces.
14.2 The Interface Group Screen
You can manually add a LAN interface to a new group. Alternatively, you can have the ZyXEL Device
automatically add the incoming traffic and the LAN interface on which traffic is received to an
interface group when its DHCP Vendor ID option information matches one listed for the interface
group.
Use the LAN screen to configure the private IP addresses the DHCP server on the ZyXEL Device
assigns to the clients in the default and/or user-defined groups. If you set the ZyXEL Device to
assign IP addresses based on the client’s DHCP Vendor ID option information, you must enable
DHCP server and configure LAN TCP/IP settings for both the default and user-defined groups. See
Chapter 8 on page 115 for more information.
In the following example, the client that sends packets with the DHCP Vendor ID option set to MSFT
5.0 (meaning it is a Windows 2000 DHCP client) is assigned the IP address 192.168.2.2 and uses
the WAN VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1 interface.
Figure 85 Interface Grouping Application
Default: ETH 2~4
192.168.1.x/24
eth10.0
VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1
192.168.2.x/24
DHCP Vendor ID option: MSFT 5.0
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
189
Chapter 14 Interface Group
Click Network Settings > Interface Group to open the following screen.
Figure 86 Network Settings > Interface Group
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 64 Network Settings > Interface Group
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add New Interface
Group
Click this button to create a new interface group.
Group Name
This shows the descriptive name of the group.
WAN Interface
This shows the WAN interfaces in the group.
LAN Interfaces
This shows the LAN interfaces in the group.
Criteria
This shows the filtering criteria for the group.
Modify
Click the Delete icon to remove the group.
Add
Click this button to create a new group.
14.2.1 Interface Group Configuration
Click the Add New Interface Group button in the Interface Group screen to open the following
screen. Use this screen to create a new interface group.
190
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Interface Group
Note: An interface can belong to only one group at a time.
Figure 87 Interface Group Configuration
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 65 Interface Group Configuration
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Group Name
Enter a name to identify this group. You can enter up to 30 characters. You can
use letters, numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_). Spaces are not
allowed.
WAN Interface
used in the
grouping
Select the WAN interface this group uses. The group can have up to one PTM
interface and up to one ATM interface.
Grouped LAN
Interfaces
Select one or more LAN interfaces (Ethernet LAN, HPNA or wireless LAN) in the
Available LAN Interfaces list and use the left arrow to move them to the
Grouped LAN Interfaces list to add the interfaces to this group.
Available LAN
Interfaces
Select No Interface/None to not add a WAN interface to this group.
To remove a LAN or wireless LAN interface from the Grouped LAN Interfaces,
use the right-facing arrow.
Automatically Add
Clients With the
following DHCP
Vendor IDs
Click Add to identify LAN hosts to add to the interface group by criteria such as
the type of the hardware or firmware. See Section 14.2.2 on page 192 for more
information.
This shows the index number of the rule.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
191
Chapter 14 Interface Group
Table 65 Interface Group Configuration (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Filter Criteria
This shows the filtering criteria. The LAN interface on which the matched traffic
is received will belong to this group automatically.
WildCard Support
This shows if wildcard on DHCP option 60 is enabled.
Remove
Click the Remove icon to delete this rule from the ZyXEL Device.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
14.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria
Click the Add button in the Interface Grouping Configuration screen to open the following
screen.
Figure 88 Interface Grouping Criteria
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 66 Interface Grouping Criteria
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Source MAC
Address
Enter the source MAC address of the packet.
DHCP Option 60
Select this option and enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60) of the
matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware.
Enable wildcard
on DHCP option
60 option
DHCP Option 61
IAID
192
Select this option to be able to use wildcards in the Vendor Class Identifier
configured for DHCP option 60.
Select this and enter the device identity of the matched traffic.
Enter the Identity Association Identifier (IAID) of the device, for example, the
WAN connection index number.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Interface Group
Table 66 Interface Grouping Criteria (continued)
LABEL
DUID type
DESCRIPTION
Select DUID-LLT (DUID Based on Link-layer Address Plus Time) to enter the
hardware type, a time value and the MAC address of the device.
Select DUID-EN (DUID Assigned by Vendor Based upon Enterprise Number) to
enter the vendor’s registered enterprise number.
Select DUID-LL (DUID Based on Link-layer Address) to enter the device’s
hardware type and hardware address (MAC address) in the following fields.
Select Other to enter any string that identifies the device in the DUID field.
DHCP Option 125
Select this and enter vendor specific information of the matched traffic.
Enterprise
Number
Enter the vendor’s 32-bit enterprise number registered with the IANA (Internet
Assigned Numbers Authority).
Manufacturer
OUI
Specify the vendor’s OUI (Organization Unique Identifier). It is usually the first
three bytes of the MAC address.
Product Class
Enter the product class of the device.
Model Name
Enter the model name of the device.
Serial Number
Enter the serial number of the device.
WildCard Support
This shows if wildcard on DHCP option 60 is enabled.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
193
Chapter 14 Interface Group
194
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
15
Firewall
15.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the ZyXEL Device firewall. Use the firewall to
protect your ZyXEL Device and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access
to it. By default the firewall:
• allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks.
• blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN.
The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant
Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2).
However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4).
Figure 89 Default Firewall Action
WAN
LAN
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the Firewall screen to configure the security level of the firewall on the ZyXEL Device
(Section 15.2 on page 197).
• Use the Protocol screen to add or remove predefined Internet services and configure firewall
rules (Section 15.3 on page 197).
• Use the Access Control screen to view and configure incoming/outgoing filtering rules (Section
15.4 on page 200).
15.1.2 What You Need to Know
SYN Attack
A SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets. Each packet causes the
targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response. While the targeted system waits for the ACK that
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
195
Chapter 15 Firewall
follows the SYN-ACK, it queues up all outstanding SYN-ACK responses on a backlog queue. SYNACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer terminates
the three-way handshake. Once the queue is full, the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests,
making the system unavailable for legitimate users.
DoS
Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the
Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer
have access to network resources. The ZyXEL Device is pre-configured to automatically detect and
thwart all known DoS attacks.
DDoS
A DDoS attack is one in which multiple compromised systems attack a single target, thereby
causing denial of service for users of the targeted system.
LAND Attack
In a LAND attack, hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of
the target system. This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself, making
the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself.
Ping of Death
Ping of Death uses a "ping" utility to create and send an IP packet that exceeds the maximum
65,536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification. This may cause systems to crash, hang or
reboot.
SPI
Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI) tracks each connection crossing the firewall and makes sure it is
valid. Filtering decisions are based not only on rules but also context. For example, traffic from the
WAN may only be allowed to cross the firewall in response to a request from the LAN.
196
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Firewall
15.2 The Firewall Screen
Use this screen to set the security level of the firewall on the ZyXEL Device. Firewall rules are
grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply.
Click Security Settings > Firewall to display the following screen.
Figure 90 Security Settings > Firewall
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 67 Security Settings > Firewall
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Low
Select Low to allow LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions.
Medium
Select Medium to allow LAN to WAN but deny WAN to LAN packet directions.
High
Select High to deny LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
15.3 The Protocol Screen
You can configure customized services and port numbers in the Protocol screen. For a
comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number
Authority) website. See Appendix E on page 333 for some examples.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
197
Chapter 15 Firewall
Click Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol to display the following screen.
Figure 91 Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 68 Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add New
Protocol
Entry
Click this to add a new protocol.
Name
This is the name of your customized service.
Description
This is the description of your customized service.
Ports/
Protocol
Number
This shows the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or TCP/UDP) and the port number or
range of ports that defines your customized service. Other and the protocol number
displays if the service uses another IP protocol.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to edit the entry.
Click the Delete icon to remove this entry.
198
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Firewall
15.3.1 Add a Protocol
Use this screen to add a customized service rule that you can use in the firewall’s ACL rule
configuration. Click Add New Protocol Entry in the Protocol screen to display the following
screen.
Figure 92 Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol > Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 69 Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol > Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add Protocol
Protocol
Choose the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or Other) that defines your customized
port from the drop-down list box. Select Other to be able to enter a protocol
number.
Source/
Destination
Port
These fields are displayed if you select TCP or UDP as the IP port.
Select Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that
define your customized service. If you select Any, the service is applied to all ports.
Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your
customized service.
Protocol
Number
This field is displayed if you select Other as the protocol.
Add
Click this to add the protocol to the Rule List below.
Enter the protocol number of your customized port.
Rule List
Protocol
This is the IP port (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or Other) that defines your customized port.
Ports/Protocol
Number
For TCP, UDP, ICMP, or TCP/UDP protocol rules this shows the port number or
range that defines the custom service. For other IP protocol rules this shows the
protocol number.
Modify
Click the Delete icon to remove the rule.
Service Name
Enter a unique name (up to 32 printable English keyboard characters, including
spaces) for your customized port.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
199
Chapter 15 Firewall
Table 69 Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol > Add (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Service
Description
Enter a description for your customized port.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
15.4 The Access Control Screen
Click Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control to display the following screen. This screen
displays a list of the configured incoming or outgoing filtering rules.
Figure 93 Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 70 Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DoS Protection
DoS (Denial of Service) attacks can flood your Internet connection with invalid
packets and connection requests, using so much bandwidth and so many
resources that Internet access becomes unavailable.
State
Deny Ping
Response
State
200
Select the Enable check box to enable protection against DoS attacks.
You can block ping request packets by enabling this function.
Select the Enable check box to block ping packets.
Add New ACL
Rule
Click this to go to add a filter rule for incoming or outgoing IP traffic.
Name
This displays the name of the rule.
Src IP
This displays the source IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that
a blank source address is equivalent to Any.
Dst IP
This displays the destination IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note
that a blank destination address is equivalent to Any.
Protocol
This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service to which this
rule applies.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Firewall
Table 70 Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Direction
This displays the direction of traffic to which this rule applies.
Action
This field displays whether the rule silently discards packets (DROP), discards
packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable
message to the sender (REJECT) or allows the passage of packets (ACCEPT).
Modify
Click the Edit icon to edit the rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Note that subsequent rules move
up by one when you take this action.
Apply
Click Apply to save the DoS Protection settings.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
15.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule
Click Add New ACL Rule or the Edit icon next to an existing ACL rule in the Access Control
screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 94 Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control > Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 71 Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control > Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
General
Filter Name
Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters, not including
spaces, underscores, and dashes.
You must enter the filter name to add an ACL rule. This field is read-only if you
are editing the ACL rule.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
201
Chapter 15 Firewall
Table 71 Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control > Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Select Source
Device
Select the source device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific
IP Address, enter the source IP address in the field below.
Source IP Address
Enter the source IP address.
Select Destination
Device
Select the destination device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select
Specific IP Address, enter the destiniation IP address in the field below.
Destination IP
Address
Enter the destination IP address.
Select Protocol
Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port from the
drop-down list box. The specific protocol rule sets you add in the Security
Settings > Firewall > Protocol > Add screen display in this list.
If you want to configure a customized protocol, select Specific Protocol.
Protocol
This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select
Protocol.
Choose the IP port (TCP/UDP, TCP, UDP, or ICMP) that defines your
customized port from the drop-down list box.
Custom Source Port This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select
Protocol.
Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the source.
Custom Destination
Port
This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in Select
Protocol.
Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the destination.
Policy
Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (DROP), deny and
send an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender of (REJECT) or
allow the passage of (ACCEPT) packets that match this rule.
Direction
Use the drop-down list box to select the direction of traffic to which this rule
applies.
Enable Rate Limit
Select this check box to set a limit on the upstream/downstream transmission
rate for the specified protocol.
Specify how many packets per minute or second the transmission rate is.
202
Scheduler Rules
Select a schedule rule for this ACL rule form the drop-down list box. You can
configure a new schedule rule by click Add new rule. This will bring you to the
Security Settings > Scheduler Rules screen.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
16
MAC Filter
16.1 Overview
This screen allows you to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to specific devices or
exclude specific devices from accessing the ZyXEL Device. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC
(Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six
pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC
addresses of the devices to configure this screen.
16.2 The MAC Filter Screen
Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s MAC filter settings. Click Security Settings > MAC
Filter. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 95 Security Settings > MAC Filter
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 72 Security Settings > MAC Filter
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
MAC Filter Setup
MAC Filter
Select Enable to activate the MAC filter function. Otherwise, select
Disable.
Add new devices to the
Allow List automatically
Select this check box if you want the ZyXEL Device to automatically add
the newly connected devices to the Allow List.
MAC Filter Lists
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
203
Chapter 16 MAC Filter
Table 72 Security Settings > MAC Filter (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Allow List
The devices in this list are permitted or denied access to the ZyXEL
Device.
Block List
Select an entry from the Allow List and use the > button to add it to
the Block List.
Select an entry from the Block List and use the < button to add it to
the Allow List.
204
Add Device
Select this to display the Add Device screen which you can add a
device to the MAC filter Allow List. Enter the device’s MAC address and
click OK.
This is the index number of the entry.
Device
This is the name of the device that is allowed access to the ZyXEL
Device.
MAC Address
This is the MAC address of the device that is allowed access to the
ZyXEL Device.
Modify
Select the entry(ies) that you want to delete in the Remove column,
then click the Delete icon.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
17
Parental Control
17.1 Overview
Parental control allows you to permit or block access to certain web sites from home network
computers.
You can define time periods and days during which the ZyXEL Device performs parental control on a
specific user in the Security Settings > Scheduler Rules screen (see Chapter 18 on page 209 for
detailed information).
17.2 The Parental Control Screen
Use this screen to configure parental control settings to block the users on your network from
accessing certain web sites.
Click Parental Control to open the following screen.
Note: You must configure a scheduler rule in the Advanced > Scheduler Rule screen
(Section 18.2 on page 209) before the parental control function can be enabled.
Click Scheduler Rule in the note to go to the Scheduler Rule screen for
configurations.
Figure 96 Parental Control
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
205
Chapter 17 Parental Control
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 73 Parental Control
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new rule
Click this to create a new parental control rule.
This is the index number of the rule.
PC Name/IP/MAC
The ZyXEL Device allows or prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with
the URLs listed below.
Access Type
This shows the access type that is applied on the user to the web site of this
rule.
Web Site
This is the URL of the web site in this rule.
Scheduler Name
This is the name of the schedule rule that is applied.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to edit the rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
17.2.1 Add/Edit Parental Control Rule
Click Add new rule in the Parental Control screen or click the Edit icon next to a rule to open the
following screen.
Figure 97 Parental Control: Add/Edit
206
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Parental Control
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 74 Parental Control: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
PC Name/IP/MAC
Select the user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop-down list box.
If you want to add an user that is not listed, select User Defined and enter its
MAC address.
This field is read-only if you are editing the parental control rule.
Access Type
Select the access type that is applied on the user to the web site of this rule.
If you select Block Web Site, the ZyXEL Device prohibits the users from
viewing the web sites with the URLs listed below.
If you select Allow Web Site, the ZyXEL Device blocks access to all URLs
except ones listed below.
If you select Block All, the ZyXEL Device blocks access to all URLs.
Web Site
Enter the URL of web site to which the ZyXEL Device blocks or allows access.
Click Add to add this URL to the list below.
Remove
Select an URL from the list and click Remove to delete it.
Scheduler Rule
Select the scheduler rule that you want to apply from the drop-down list box. If
you have not configured a scheduler rule or want to add a new one, click the
Add New Rule button to go to the Scheduler Rule screen. See Chapter 18 on
page 209 for more information.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
207
Chapter 17 Parental Control
208
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
18
Scheduler Rules
18.1 Overview
You can define time periods and days during which the ZyXEL Device performs scheduled rules of
certain features (such as Firewall Access Control, Parental Control) on a specific user in the
Scheduler Rules screen.
18.2 The Scheduler Rules Screen
Use this screen to view, add, or edit time schedule rules.
Click Advanced > Scheduler Rules to open the following screen.
Figure 98 Advanced > Scheduler Rules
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 75 Advanced > Scheduler Rules
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new rule
Click this to create a new rule.
This is the index number of the entry.
Rule Name
This shows the name of the rule.
Day
This shows the day(s) on which this rule is enabled.
Time
This shows the period of time on which this rule is enabled.
Description
This shows the description of this rule.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to edit the schedule.
Click the Delete icon to delete a scheduler rule.
Note: You cannot delete a scheduler rule once it is applied to a
certain feature.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
209
Chapter 18 Scheduler Rules
18.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule
Click the Add button in the Scheduler Rules screen or click the Edit icon next to a schedule rule
to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule for a specific
user on your network.
Figure 99 Scheduler Rules: Add/Edit
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 76 Scheduler Rules: Add/Edit
210
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Rule Name
Enter a name (up to 31 printable English keyboard characters, not including
spaces) for this schedule.
Day
Select check boxes for the days that you want the ZyXEL Device to perform this
scheduler rule.
Time if Day Range
Enter the time period of each day, in 24-hour format, during which parental
control will be enforced.
Description
Enter a description for this scheduler rule.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
19
Certificates
19.1 Overview
The ZyXEL Device can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are
based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owner’s identity and public
key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication.
19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The Local Certificates screen lets you generate certification requests and import the ZyXEL
Device's CA-signed certificates (Section 19.4 on page 219).
• The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the ZyXEL Device (Section
19.4 on page 219).
19.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
Certification Authority
A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate
owner. There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government
certification authorities. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone
can then use the certification authority's public key to verify the certificates. You can use the ZyXEL
Device to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and
then send the certification requests to a certification authority.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
211
Chapter 19 Certificates
19.3 The Local Certificates Screen
Click Security Settings > Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen. This is the ZyXEL
Device’s summary list of certificates and certification requests.
Figure 100 Security Settings > Certificates > Local Certificates
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 77 Security Settings > Certificates > Local Certificates
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Create Certificate
Request
Click this button to go to the screen where you can have the ZyXEL Device
generate a certification request.
Import Certificate
Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate that you
have enrolled from a certification authority from your computer to the ZyXEL
Device.
Name
This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended
that you give each certificate a unique name.
In Use
This field displays whether the certificate is in use and how many applications
use the certificate.
Subject
This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as
CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization
or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have
unique subject information.
Type
This field displays what kind of certificate this is.
request represents a certification request and is not yet a valid certificate. Send
a certification request to a certification authority, which then issues a certificate.
Use the Load Certificate screen to import the certificate and replace the
request.
signed represents a certificate issued by a certification authority.
Modify
Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about
the certificate (or certification request).
For a certification request, click Load Signed to import the signed certificate.
Click the Remove icon to delete the certificate (or certification request). You
cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use.
212
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 19 Certificates
19.3.1 Create Certificate Request
Click Security Settings > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Create Certificate
Request to open the following screen. Use this screen to have the ZyXEL Device generate a
certification request.
Figure 101 Create Certificate Request
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 78 Create Certificate Request
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Certificate Name
Type up to 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this
certificate.
Common Name
Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or e-mail
address in the field provided. The domain name or e-mail address can be up
to 63 ASCII characters. The domain name or e-mail address is for
identification purposes only and can be any string.
Organization Name
Type up to 63 characters to identify the company or group to which the
certificate owner belongs. You may use any character, including spaces, but
the ZyXEL Device drops trailing spaces.
State/Province Name
Type up to 32 characters to identify the state or province where the
certificate owner is located. You may use any character, including spaces, but
the ZyXEL Device drops trailing spaces.
Country/Region
Name
Select a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is located.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
After you click Apply, the following screen displays to notify you that you need to get the certificate
request signed by a Certificate Authority. If you already have, click Load_Signed to import the
signed certificate into the ZyXEL Device. Otherwise click Back to return to the Local Certificates
screen.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
213
Chapter 19 Certificates
Figure 102 Certificate Request Created
19.3.2 Load Signed Certificate
After you create a certificate request and have it signed by a Certificate Authority, in the Local
Certificates screen click the certificate request’s Load Signed icon to import the signed certificate
into the ZyXEL Device.
214
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 19 Certificates
Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can import
it.
Figure 103 Load Signed Certificate
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 79 Load Signed Certificate
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Certificate
Name
This is the name of the signed certificate.
Certificate
Copy and paste the signed certificate into the text box to store it on the ZyXEL Device.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
19.3.3 Import Certificate
Click Security Settings > Local Certificates and then Import Certificate to open the Import
Local Certificate screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save an existing certificate to the
ZyXEL Device.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
215
Chapter 19 Certificates
Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can import
it.
Figure 104 Import Local Certificate
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 80 Import Local Certificate
216
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Import from
file
Click this check box to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a
certification authority that you trust, from your computer to the ZyXEL Device.
Certificate
Name
Type up to 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this certificate.
Certificate
Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the ZyXEL Device.
Private Key
Copy and paste the private key into the text box to store it on the ZyXEL Device.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 19 Certificates
Table 80 Import Local Certificate (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
If you click Import from file in the Import Local Certificate screen, the following screen is
displayed.
Figure 105 Import Local Certificate > Import from file
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 81 Import Local Certificate > Import from file
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Certificate
File Path
Type in the location of the certificate you want to upload in this field or click Browse ...
to find it.
Private Key
is protected
by a
password?
Enter the private key into the text box to store it on the ZyXEL Device. The private key
should not exceed 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces).
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
19.3.4 Certificate Details
Click Security Settings> Certificates > Local Certificates to open the My Certificates screen.
Click the View icon to open the Certificate Details screen. Use this screen to view in-depth
certificate information and change the certificate’s name.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
217
Chapter 19 Certificates
Figure 106 Certificate Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 82 Certificate Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Name
This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want to
change the name, type up to 63 characters to identify this certificate. You may
use any character (not including spaces).
Type
This field displays general information about the certificate. signed means
that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. request means this is a
certification request.
Subject
This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such
as Common Name (CN), Organization (O), State (ST) and Country (C).
Certificate
This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM)
format. PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable
form.
This displays null in a certification request.
You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or
colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save
the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for
example).
218
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 19 Certificates
Table 82 Certificate Details (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Private Key
This read-only text box displays the private key in Privacy Enhanced Mail
(PEM) format. PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a
printable form.
You can copy and paste the private key into an e-mail to send to friends or
colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save
the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for
example).
Signing Request
This read-only text box displays the request information in Privacy Enhanced
Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a
printable form.
This displays null in a signed certificate.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
19.4 The Trusted CA Screen
Click Security Settings > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the following screen. This screen
displays a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the ZyXEL
Device to accept as trusted. The ZyXEL Device accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification
authority on this list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is
signed by one of these certification authorities.
Figure 107 Security Settings > Certificates > Trusted CA
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 83 Security Settings > Certificates > Trusted CA
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Import Certificate
Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a
certification authority that you trust to the ZyXEL Device.
Name
This field displays the name used to identify this certificate.
Subject
This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such
as Common Name (CN), OU (Organizational Unit or department), Organization
(O), State (ST) and Country (C). It is recommended that each certificate have
unique subject information.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
219
Chapter 19 Certificates
Table 83 Security Settings > Certificates > Trusted CA (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Type
This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a
Certification Authority signed the certificate.
Action
Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about
the certificate (or certification request).
Click the Remove button to delete the certificate (or certification request). You
cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use.
19.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate
Click the View icon in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to view
in-depth information about the certification authority’s certificate.
Figure 108 Trusted CA: View
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 84 Trusted CA: View
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Name
This field displays the identifying name of this certificate.
Type
This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a
Certification Authority signed the certificate.
Subject
This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such
as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O) and
Country (C).
Certificate
This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM)
format. PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable
form.
You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or
colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save
the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for
example).
Back
220
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 19 Certificates
19.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate
Click the Import Certificate button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. The
ZyXEL Device trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates.
Figure 109 Trusted CA: Import Certificate
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 85 Trusted CA: Import Certificate
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Import from file
Click this check box to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a
certification authority that you trust, from your computer to the ZyXEL Device.
Certificate Name
Enter the name that identifies this certificate. The certificate name should not
exceed 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces).
Certificate
Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the ZyXEL Device.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
221
Chapter 19 Certificates
If you click Import from file in the Import Local Certificate screen, the following screen is displayed.
Figure 110 Trusted CA: Import Certificate > Import from file
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 86 Import Local Certificate
222
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Certificate
File Path
Type in the location of the certificate you want to upload in this field or click Browse ...
to find it.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
20
Service Control
20.1 Overview
This chapter provides information on the Service Control screens.
Service Control allows you to manage your ZyXEL Device from a remote location through the
following interfaces:
• LAN
• WAN
Note: The ZyXEL Device is managed using the Web Configurator.
20.2 The Service Control Screen
Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) users can use which service(s) to manage
the ZyXEL Device.
Click Security Settings > Service Control to open the following screen.
Figure 111 Security Settings > Service Control
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
223
Chapter 20 Service Control
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 87 Security Settings > Service Control
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
General
This is the index number of the entry.
Services Name
This is the service you may use to access the ZyXEL Device.
LAN
Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to
allow access to the ZyXEL Device from the LAN.
WAN
Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to
allow access to the ZyXEL Device from the WAN.
Port
You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you
must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote
management.
Certificate
224
HTTPS Certificate
Select a certificate the HTTPS server (the ZyXEL Device) uses to authenticate
itself to the HTTPS client. You must have certificates already configured in the
Certificates screen.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
21
ARP Table
21.1 Overview
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP
address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on
the local area network.
An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The
ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address.
21.1.1 How ARP Works
When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the device,
the device's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and, if it finds the address, sends it to the device.
If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN.
The device fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP
address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the device puts all ones in the target
MAC field (FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is either
the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast
address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer
directly back to the requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then
sends the packet to the MAC address that replied.
21.2 ARP Table Screen
Use the ARP table to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s). To open this screen, click System
Monitor > ARP Table.
Figure 112 System Monitor > ARP Table
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
225
Chapter 21 ARP Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 88 System Monitor > ARP Table
LABEL
226
DESCRIPTION
This is the ARP table entry number.
IP Address
This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a port.
MAC Address
This is the MAC address of the device with the listed IP address.
Device
This is the type of interface used by the device. You can click on the device
type to go to its configuration screen.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
22
Logs
22.1 Overview
The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the
ZyXEL Device log and then display the logs or have the ZyXEL Device send them to an
administrator (as e-mail) or to a syslog server.
22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the System Log screen to see the system logs for the categories that you select (Section
22.2 on page 228).
• Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select
(Section 22.3 on page 229).
22.1.2 What You Need To Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
Alerts and Logs
An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks
(access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as System
Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log
screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black.
Syslog Overview
The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to
syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog
message and send it to a syslog server.
Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related
information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog
facility identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for
details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels.
Table 89 Syslog Severity Levels
CODE
SEVERITY
Emergency: The system is unusable.
Alert: Action must be taken immediately.
Critical: The system condition is critical.
Error: There is an error condition on the system.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
227
Chapter 22 Logs
Table 89 Syslog Severity Levels (continued)
CODE
SEVERITY
Warning: There is a warning condition on the system.
Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system.
Informational: The syslog contains an informational message.
Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes.
22.2 The System Log Screen
Use the System Log screen to see the system logs for the categories that you select in
Maintenance > Log Setting. Click System Monitor > Log to open the System Log screen.
Figure 113 System Monitor > Log > System Log
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 90 System Monitor > Log > System Log
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Level
Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results
according to the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the
ZyXEL Device searches through all logs of that severity or higher.
Category
Select the type of logs to display.
Clear Log
Click this to delete all the logs.
Refresh
Click this to renew the log screen.
Export Log
Click this to export the selected log(s).
Email Log Now
Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the
Maintenance > Logs Setting screen.
System Log
228
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Logs
Table 90 System Monitor > Log > System Log (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.
Time
This field displays the time the log was recorded.
Facility
The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer
to the documentation of your syslog program for more details.
Level
This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this
syslog server.
Messages
This field states the reason for the log.
22.3 The Security Log Screen
Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select.
Click System Monitor > Log > Security Log to open the following screen.
Figure 114 System Monitor > Log > Security Log
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 91 System Monitor > Log > Security Log
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Level
Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results
according to the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the
ZyXEL Device searches through all logs of that severity or higher.
Category
Select the type of logs to display.
Clear Log
Click this to delete all the logs.
Refresh
Click this to renew the log screen.
Export Log
Click this to export the selected log(s).
Email Log Now
Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the
Maintenance > Logs Setting screen.
This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.
Time
This field displays the time the log was recorded.
Facility
The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer
to the documentation of your syslog program for more details.
Level
This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this
syslog server.
Messages
This field states the reason for the log.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
229
Chapter 22 Logs
230
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
23
Traffic Status
23.1 Overview
Use the Traffic Status screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN and LAN
interfaces.
23.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics (Section 23.2 on page 231).
• Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics (Section 23.3 on page 233).
• Use the HPNA screen to view the HPNA traffic statistics (Section 23.4 on page 234).
23.2 The WAN Status Screen
Click System Monitor > Traffic Status to open the WAN screen. The figure in this screen shows
the number of bytes received and sent on the ZyXEL Device.
Figure 115 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
231
Chapter 23 Traffic Status
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 92 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Connected
Interface
This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected.
Packets Sent
Data
This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Error
This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
Drop
This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Packets Received
Data
This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.
Error
This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
Drop
This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
more.../less
Click more... to show more information. Click less to hide them.
Disabled
Interface
This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently disconnected.
Packets Sent
Data
This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Error
This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
Drop
This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Packets Received
232
Data
This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.
Error
This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
Drop
This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 23 Traffic Status
23.3 The LAN Status Screen
Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN to open the following screen.
Figure 116 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 93 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Polls Interval(s)
Select how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen.
Interface
This shows the LAN or WLAN interface.
Bytes Sent
This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface.
Bytes Received
This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface.
more.../less
Click more... to show more information. Click less to hide them.
Interface
This shows the LAN or WLAN interface.
Packets Sent
Data
This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Error
This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
Drop
This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Packets Received
Data
This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.
Error
This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
Drop
This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
233
Chapter 23 Traffic Status
23.4 The HPNA Status Screen
Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > HPNA to open the following screen.
Figure 117 System Monitor > Traffic Status > HPNA
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 94 System Monitor > Traffic Status > HPNA
234
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Role
This shows the role of the client connected to the ZyXEL Device’s HPNA port.
Device
This shows the MAC address of the client connected to the ZyXEL Device’s HPNA
port.
TX Packet
This indicates the number of packets transmitted by this client.
RX Packet
This indicates the number of packets received by this client.
TX Byte
This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface.
RX Byte
This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface.
TX Error
This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
RX Error
This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
TX Drop
This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
RX Drop
This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
24
IGMP Status
24.1 Overview
Use the IGMP Status screens to look at IGMP group status and traffic statistics.
24.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the IGMP Group screen to look at the current list of multicast groups the ZyXEL Device has
joined and which ports have joined each (Section 24.2 on page 235.
• Use the IGMP Statistics screen to look at the current number of IGMP-related packets received
for each IGMP multicast group and from each LAN host (Section 24.3 on page 236).
24.2 The IGMP Group Screen
Use this screen to look at the current list of multicast groups the ZyXEL Device has joined and
which ports have joined it. To open this screen, click System Monitor > IGMP Group Status >
IGMP Group.
Figure 118 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status > IGMP Group
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 95 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status > IGMP Group
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Interface
This field displays the name of an interface on the ZyXEL Device that belongs to an
IGMP multicast group.
Multicast Group
This field displays the name of the IGMP multicast group to which the interface
belongs.
Filter Mode
INCLUDE means that only the IP addresses in the Source List get to receive the
multicast group’s traffic.
EXCLUDE means that the IP addresses in the Source List are not allowed to
receive the multicast group’s traffic but other IP addresses can.
Source List
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
This is the list of IP addresses that are allowed or not allowed to receive the
multicast group’s traffic depending on the filter mode.
235
Chapter 24
24.3 IGMP Statistics Screen
Use this screen to look at the current number of IGMP-related packets received for each IGMP
multicast group and from each LAN host. To open this screen, click System Monitor > IGMP
Group Status > IGMP Statistics.
Figure 119 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status > IGMP Statistics
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 96 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status > IGMP Statistics
236
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IGMP Multicast
Group Statistics
This section shows statistics about the number of IGMP-related packets received
for each IGMP multicast group.
Multicast Group
This field displays the name of the IGMP multicast group for which the ZyXEL
Device received IGMP-related packets.
Last Report
Time
This field displays when the ZyXEL Device received the latest packet for this IGMP
multicast group.
Total Time
(sec)
This field displays the total amount of time the ZyXEL Device counted from when
the IGMP multicast group was joined to when it was left.
Total Joins
This field displays the total number of Join packets the ZyXEL Device has received
for this IGMP multicast group.
Total Leaves
This field displays the total number of Leave packets the ZyXEL Device has
received for this IGMP multicast group.
IGMP LAN Host
Statistics
This section shows statistics about the number of IGMP-related packets received
from each LAN host.
Host Address
This field displays the IP address of a LAN computer that has sent the ZyXEL
Device IGMP-related packets.
Last Report
Time
This field displays when the ZyXEL Device received the latest packet from this LAN
IP address for this IGMP multicast group.
Total Time
(sec)
This field displays the total amount of time the ZyXEL Device counted from when
the LAN IP address joined the IGMP multicast group to when it left.
Total Joins
This field displays the total number of Join packets the ZyXEL Device has received
from this LAN IP address.
Total Leaves
This field displays the total number of Leave packets the ZyXEL Device has
received from this LAN IP address.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
25
xDSL Statistics
25.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen
Use this screen to view detailed DSL statistics. Click System Monitor > xDSL Statistics to open
the following screen.
Figure 120 System Monitor > xDSL Statistics
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
237
Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 97 Status > xDSL Statistics
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval
Select the time interval for refreshing statistics.
Line
Select which DSL line’s statistics you want to display.
xDSL Training
Status
This displays the current state of setting up the DSL connection.
Mode
This displays the ITU standard used for this connection.
Traffic Type
This displays the type of traffic the DSL port is sending and receiving. Inactive
displays if the DSL port is not currently sending or receiving traffic.
Link Uptime
This displays how long the port has been running (or connected) since the last
time it was started.
xDSL Port Details
Upstream
These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the
service provider.
Downstream
These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the
service provider.
Line Rate
These are the data transfer rates at which the port is sending and receiving data.
Actual Net Data
Rate
These are the rates at which the port is sending and receiving the payload data
without transport layer protocol headers and traffic.
Trellis Coding
This displays whether or not the port is using Trellis coding for traffic it is sending
and receiving. Trellis coding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions.
Trellis may reduce throughput but it makes the connection more stable.
SNR Margin
This is the upstream and downstream Signal-to-Noise Ratio margin (in dB). A
DMT sub-carrier’s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the
received noise power. The signal-to-noise ratio margin is the maximum that the
received noise power could increase with the system still being able to meet its
transmission targets.
Actual Delay
This is the upstream and downstream interleave delay. It is the wait (in
milliseconds) that determines the size of a single block of data to be interleaved
(assembled) and then transmitted. Interleave delay is used when transmission
error correction (Reed- Solomon) is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone
line. The bigger the delay, the bigger the data block size, allowing better error
correction to be performed.
Transmit Power
This is the upstream and downstream far end actual aggregate transmit power (in
dBm).
Upstream is how much power the port is using to transmit to the service provider.
Downstream is how much port the service provider is using to transmit to the
port.
238
Receive Power
Upstream is how much power the service provider is receiving from the port.
Downstream is how much power the port is receiving from the service provider.
Actual INP
Sudden spikes in the line’s level of external noise (impulse noise) can cause errors
and result in lost packets. This could especially impact the quality of multimedia
traffic such as voice or video. Impulse noise protection (INP) provides a buffer to
allow for correction of errors caused by error correction to deal with this. The
number of DMT (Discrete Multi-Tone) symbols shows the level of impulse noise
protection for the upstream and downstream traffic. A higher symbol value
provides higher error correction capability, but it causes overhead and higher
delay which may increase error rates in received multimedia data.
Total Attenuation
This is the upstream and downstream line attenuation, measured in decibels (dB).
This attenuation is the difference between the power transmitted at the near-end
and the power received at the far-end. Attenuation is affected by the channel
characteristics (wire gauge, quality, condition and length of the physical line).
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics
Table 97 Status > xDSL Statistics (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Attainable Net
Data Rate
These are the highest theoretically possible transfer rates at which the port could
send and receive payload data without transport layer protocol headers and
traffic.
xDSL Counters
Downstream
These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the
service provider.
Upstream
These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the
service provider.
FEC
This is the number of Far End Corrected blocks.
CRC
This is the number of Cyclic Redundancy Checks.
ES
This is the number of Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing
at least one errored block or at least one defect.
SES
This is the number of Severely Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds
containing 30% or more errored blocks or at least one defect. This is a subset of
ES.
UAS
This is the number of UnAvailable Seconds.
LOS
This is the number of Loss Of Signal seconds.
LOF
This is the number of Loss Of Frame seconds.
LOM
This is the number of Loss of Margin seconds.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
239
Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics
240
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
26
Users Configuration
26.1 Overview
In the Users Configuration screen, you can view, add, and configure user accounts of the ZyXEL
Device.
26.2 The Users Configuration Screen
Click Maintenance > Users Configuration to open the following screen.
Figure 121 Maintenance > Users Configuration
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
241
Chapter 26 Users Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 98 Maintenance > Users Configuration
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Advanced
Account
Security
Select Enable to turn on advanced account security to enforce tighter security for
the ZyXEL Device’s user accounts. This includes:
•
•
•
•
The user names must be a minimum length of six characters and include both
letters and numbers.
The number of dots that appears when you type the password in the login
screen’s password field changes randomly to prevent anyone watching the
password field from knowing the length of your password.
The ZyXEL Device notifies users when their passwords expire and forces them
to change to a new one in order to log in.
The new password the user selects cannot match any of the user’s three
previously used passwords.
Add new user
Click this to configure a new user account.
This is the index number of the entry.
User Name
This field displays the name of the user.
Retry Times
This field indicates how many times a user can re-enter his/her account
information before the ZyXEL Device locks the user out.
Idle Timeout
This field indicates the number of minutes that the system can idle before being
logged out.
Lock Period
This field indicates the number of minutes for the lockout period. A user cannot log
into the ZyXEL Device during the lockout period, even if he/she enters correct
account information.
Group
This field displays the login account type of the user.
Different login account types have different privilege levels. The web configurator
screens and privileges vary depending on which account type you use to log in.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to edit this user account.
26.2.1 Add/Edit a Users Account
Use this screen to add or edit a users account. Click Add new user in the Users Configuration
screen or the Edit icon next to the user account you want to edit. The screen shown next appears.
Figure 122 Users Configuration: Add/Edit
242
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 26 Users Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 99 Users Configuration: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
User Name
This field is read-only if you are editing the user account.
Enter a descriptive name for the user account. The user name can be up to 15
alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, a-z, -, _ with no spaces). With advanced
account security enabled, the user names must be a minimum length of six
characters and include both letters and numbers.
Password
Specify the password associated to this account. The password can be 6 to 15
alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, a-z, -, _ with no spaces), not containing the
user name. It must contain both letters and numbers.
The characters are displayed as asterisks (*) in this field.
Verify Password
Enter the exact same password that you just entered in the above field.
Verify New
Password
This field is displayed only when you are editing the user account.
Retry Times
The ZyXEL Device can lock a user out if you use a wrong user name or password
to log in the ZyXEL Device.
Enter the exact same password that you just entered in the above field.
Enter up to how many times a user can re-enter his/her account information
before the ZyXEL Device locks the user out.
Idle Timeout
Enter the number of minutes that the system can idle before being logged out.
Lock Period
Enter the number of minutes for the lockout period. A user cannot log into the
ZyXEL Device during the lockout period, even if he/she enters correct account
information.
Group
This field is read-only if you are editing the user account.
Select a type of login account. The web configurator screens and privileges vary
depending on which account type you use to log in. Administrator accounts can
configure the ZyXEL Device while User accounts can only view some status
information.
Users logged in with either type of account can access the Internet.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
243
Chapter 26 Users Configuration
244
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
27
Remote Management
27.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to configure the ZyXEL Device’s TR-069 and TR-064 auto-configuration
settings.
27.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The TR-069 screen lets you configure the ZyXEL Device’s TR-069 auto-configuration settings
(Section 27.2 on page 245).
• The TR-064 screen lets you enable management via TR-064 on the ZyXEL Device (Section 27.3
on page 247).
• Your ZyXEL Device can act as an SNMP agent, which allows a manager station to manage and
monitor the ZyXEL Device through the network. Use the SNMP Agent screen to configure
through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use SNMP to access the
ZyXEL Device.
27.2 The TR-069 Clients Screen
TR-069 defines how Customer Premise Equipment (CPE), for example your ZyXEL Device, can be
managed over the WAN by an Auto Configuration Server (ACS). TR-069 is based on sending
Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs) between an ACS and a client device. RPCs are sent in Extensible
Markup Language (XML) format over HTTP or HTTPS.
An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the ZyXEL Device, modify settings, perform
firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the ZyXEL Device. You have to enable the
device to be managed by the ACS and specify the ACS IP address or domain name and username
and password.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
245
Chapter 27 Remote Management
Click Maintenance > Remote MGMT > TR-069 Client to open the following screen. Use this
screen to configure your ZyXEL Device to be managed by an ACS.
Figure 123 Maintenance > Remote MGMT > TR-069 Client
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 100 Maintenance > Remote MGMT > TR-069 Client
246
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Inform
Select Enable for the ZyXEL Device to send periodic inform via TR-069 on the
WAN. Otherwise, select Disable.
Inform Interval
Enter the time interval (in seconds) at which the ZyXEL Device sends
information to the auto-configuration server.
ACS URL
Enter the URL or IP address of the auto-configuration server.
ACS User Name
Enter the TR-069 user name for authentication with the auto-configuration
server.
ACS Password
Enter the TR-069 password for authentication with the auto-configuration
server.
WAN Interface
used by TR-069
client
Select a WAN interface through which the TR-069 traffic passes.
If you select Any_WAN, you should also select the pre-configured WAN
connection(s).
Display SOAP
messages on serial
console
Select Enable to show the SOAP messages on the console.
Connection
Request
Authentication
Select this option to enable authentication when there is a connection request
from the ACS.
Connection
Request User
Name
Enter the connection request user name.
Connection
Request Password
Enter the connection request password.
Connection
Request URL
This shows the connection request URL.
When the ACS makes a connection request to the ZyXEL Device, this user
name is used to authenticate the ACS.
When the ACS makes a connection request to the ZyXEL Device, this password
is used to authenticate the ACS.
The ACS can use this URL to make a connection request to the ZyXEL Device.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 27 Remote Management
Table 100 Maintenance > Remote MGMT > TR-069 Client (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
27.3 The TR-064 Screen
TR-064 is a LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum. TR-064 is built on
top of UPnP. It allows the users to use a TR-064 compliant CPE management application on their
computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and configure user-specific parameters, such as the
username and password.
Click Maintenance > Remote MGMT > TR-064 Client to open the following screen.
Figure 124 Maintenance > Remote MGMT > TR-064 Client
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 101 Maintenance > Remote MGMT > TR-064 Client
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable TR064
Select the check box to activate management via TR-064 on the LAN.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
27.4 The SNMP Agent Screen
Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information
between network devices. Your ZyXEL Device supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a
manager station to manage and monitor the ZyXEL Device through the network. The ZyXEL Device
supports SNMP version one (SNMPv1) and version two (SNMPv2c). The next figure illustrates an
SNMP management operation.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
247
Chapter 27 Remote Management
Figure 125 SNMP Management Model
An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager.
An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the ZyXEL Device).
An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form
compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform
network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed
devices.
The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of
information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include such as number of
packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of
managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing
these objects.
SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The
manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:
• Get - Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.
• GetNext - Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an
agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it
initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations.
• Set - Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.
• Trap - Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.
248
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 27 Remote Management
Click Maintenance > Remote MGMT > SNMP to open the following screen. Use this screen to
configure the ZyXEL Device SNMP settings.
Figure 126 Maintenance > Remote MGMT > SNMP
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 102 Maintenance > Remote MGMT > SNMP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
SNMP Agent
Select Enable to allow a manager station to manage and monitor the ZyXEL
Device through the network via SNMP. Otherwise, select Disable.
Read Community
Enter the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the
management station. The default is public and allows all requests.
Set Community
Enter the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests
from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests.
System Name
Enter the system name of the ZyXEL Device.
System Location
Specify the geographic location of the ZyXEL Device.
System Contact
Enter the name of the person in charge of the ZyXEL Device.
Trap Manager IP
Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
249
Chapter 27 Remote Management
250
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
28
Time Settings
28.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password,
name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval.
28.2 The Time Setting Screen
To change your ZyXEL Device’s time and date, click Maintenance > Time Setting. The screen
appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the ZyXEL Device’s time based on your local time
zone.
Figure 127 Maintenance > Time Setting
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
251
Chapter 28 Time Settings
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 103 Maintenance > Time Setting
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Current Date/Time
System Time
This field displays the time and fate of your ZyXEL Device.
Each time you reload this page, the ZyXEL Device synchronizes the time and
date with the time server.
NTP Time Server
First ~ Fifth NTP
time server
Select an NTP time server from the drop-down list box.
Otherwise, select Other and enter the IP address or URL (up to 29 extended
ASCII characters in length) of your time server.
Select None if you don’t want to configure the time server.
Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information.
Time zone offset
Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between
your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Daylight Saving
Daylight Saving Time is a period from late spring to early fall when many
countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more
daytime light in the evening.
State
Select Enable if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Start rule:
Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you enabled
Daylight Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific
day of a specific week in a particular month. The Time field uses the 24 hour
format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second
Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight
Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States, set the day to
Second, Sunday, the month to March and the time to 2 in the Hour field.
Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March.
All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at
the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would
set the day to Last, Sunday and the month to March. The time you select in
the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you
would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany's time zone is one hour
ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
End rule
Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you enabled
Daylight Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific
day of a specific week in a particular month. The Time field uses the 24 hour
format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November.
Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M.
local time. So in the United States you would set the day to First, Sunday, the
month to November and the time to 2 in the Hour field.
Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October.
All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at
the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would
set the day to Last, Sunday, and the month to October. The time you select in
the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you
would select 2 in the Hour field because Germany's time zone is one hour
ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
252
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
29
Logs Setting
29.1 Overview
You can configure where the ZyXEL Device sends logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the
ZyXEL Device records in the Logs Setting screen.
29.2 The Logs Setting Screen
To change your ZyXEL Device’s log settings, click Maintenance > Logs Setting. The screen
appears as shown.
Figure 128 Maintenance > Logs Setting
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
253
Chapter 29 Logs Setting
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 104 Maintenance > Logs Setting
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Syslog Logging
The ZyXEL Device sends a log to an external syslog server.
Active
Select the Active check box to enable syslog logging.
Mode
Select the syslog destination from the drop-down list box.
If you select Remote, the log(s) will be sent to a remote syslog server. If you
select Local File, the log(s) will be saved in a local file. If you want to send the
log(s) to a remote syslog server and save it in a local file, select Local File and
Remote.
Syslog Server IP
Address
Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected
categories of logs.
UDP Port
Enter the port number used by the syslog server.
E-mail Log Settings
Mail Server
Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail
addresses specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages will
not be sent via E-mail.
System Log Mail
Subject
Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the system log e-mail
message that the ZyXEL Device sends.
Security Log
Mail Subject
Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the security log e-mail
message that the ZyXEL Device sends.
From
Specify where the logs are sent from.
Send Log to
The ZyXEL Device sends logs to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this
field is left blank, the ZyXEL Device does not send logs via E-mail.
Send Alarm to
Alerts are real-time notifications that are sent as soon as an event, such as a DoS
attack, system error, or forbidden web access attempt occurs. Enter the E-mail
address where the alert messages will be sent. Alerts include system errors,
attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites. If this field is left blank, alert
messages will not be sent via E-mail.
Alarm Interval
Specify how often the alarm should be updated.
Allowed
Capacity Before
Email
Set what percent of the ZyXEL Device’s log storage space can be filled before the
ZyXEL Device sends a log e-mail.
SMTP
Authentication
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is the message-exchange standard for the
Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one E-mail server to another.
Select the check box to activate SMTP authentication. If mail server authentication
is needed but this feature is disabled, you will not receive the E-mail logs.
User Name
Enter the user name (up to 32 characters) (usually the user name of a mail
account).
Password
Enter the password associated with the user name above.
Clear log after
sending mail
Select this to delete all the logs after the ZyXEL Device sends an E-mail of the
logs.
Active Log and Alert
254
System Log
Select the categories of system logs that you want to record.
Security Log
Select the categories of security logs that you want to record.
Send immediate
alert
Select log categories for which you want the ZyXEL Device to send E-mail alerts
immediately.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 29 Logs Setting
29.2.1 Example E-mail Log
An "End of Log" message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent. The
following is an example of a log sent by e-mail.
• You may edit the subject title.
• The date format here is Day-Month-Year.
• The date format here is Month-Day-Year. The time format is Hour-Minute-Second.
• "End of Log" message shows that a complete log has been sent.
Figure 129 E-mail Log Example
Subject:
Firewall Alert From
Date:
Fri, 07 Apr 2000 10:05:42
From:
user@zyxel.com
To:
user@zyxel.com
1|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1
To:192.168.1.255
|default policy |forward
| 09:54:03 |UDP
src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00>
2|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131
To:192.168.1.255
|default policy |forward
| 09:54:17 |UDP
src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00>
3|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.6
To:10.10.10.10 |match
|forward
| 09:54:19 |UDP
src port:03516 dest port:00053 |<1,01>
……………………………..{snip}…………………………………..
……………………………..{snip}…………………………………..
126|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1
To:192.168.1.255
|match
|forward
| 10:05:00 |UDP
src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02>
127|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131
To:192.168.1.255
|match
|forward
| 10:05:17 |UDP
src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02>
128|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1
To:192.168.1.255
|match
|forward
| 10:05:30 |UDP
src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02>
End of Firewall Log
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
255
Chapter 29 Logs Setting
256
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
30
Firmware Upgrade
30.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your ZyXEL Device. You can download new
firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your
device’s performance.
Only use firmware for your device’s specific model. Refer to the label on
the bottom of your ZyXEL Device.
30.2 The Firmware Screen
Click Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade to open the following screen. The upload process uses
HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the
system will reboot.
Do NOT turn off the ZyXEL Device while firmware upload is in progress!
Figure 130 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 105 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Restore default
settings after
firmware
upgrade
Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to restore to its default settings after
firmware upgrade.
Current
Firmware
Version
This is the present Firmware version and the date created.
File Path
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ...
to find it.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
257
Chapter 30 Firmware Upgrade
Table 105 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Browse...
Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must
decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Upload
Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.
After you see the firmware updating screen, wait two minutes before logging into the ZyXEL Device
again.
Figure 131 Firmware Uploading
The ZyXEL Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In
some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 132 Network Temporarily Disconnected
After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen.
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the
Firmware Upgrade screen.
Figure 133 Error Message
258
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
31
Configuration
31.1 Overview
The Configuration screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations. You can also
reset your device settings back to the factory default.
31.2 The Configuration Screen
Click Maintenance > Configuration. Information related to factory defaults, backup
configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next.
Figure 134 Maintenance > Configuration
Backup Configuration
Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the ZyXEL Device’s current configuration to a file
on your computer. Once your ZyXEL Device is configured and functioning properly, it is highly
recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The
backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.
Click Backup to save the ZyXEL Device’s current configuration to your computer.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
259
Chapter 31 Configuration
Restore Configuration
Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your
computer to your ZyXEL Device.
Table 106 Restore Configuration
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
File Path
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to
find it.
Browse...
Click this to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress
compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them.
Upload
Click this to begin the upload process.
Do not turn off the ZyXEL Device while configuration file upload is in
progress.
After the ZyXEL Device configuration has been restored successfully, the login screen appears.
Login again to restart the ZyXEL Device.
The ZyXEL Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In
some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 135 Network Temporarily Disconnected
If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your
computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1). See
Appendix A on page 279 for details on how to set up your computer’s IP address.
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the
Configuration screen.
Figure 136 Configuration Upload Error
260
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 31 Configuration
Reset to Factory Defaults
Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the ZyXEL
Device to its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears.
Figure 137 Reset Warning Message
Figure 138 Reset In Process Message
You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your ZyXEL
Device. Refer to Section 1.6 on page 26 for more information on the RESET button.
31.3 The Reboot Screen
System restart allows you to reboot the ZyXEL Device remotely without turning the power off. You
may need to do this if the ZyXEL Device hangs, for example.
Click Maintenance > Reboot. Click Reboot to have the ZyXEL Device reboot. This does not affect
the ZyXEL Device's configuration.
Figure 139 Maintenance > Reboot
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
261
C HAPTER
32
Diagnostic
32.1 Overview
The Diagnostic screens display information to help you identify problems with the ZyXEL Device.
The route between a CO VDSL switch and one of its CPE may go through switches owned by
independent organizations. A connectivity fault point generally takes time to discover and impacts
subscriber’s network access. In order to eliminate the management and maintenance efforts, IEEE
802.1ag is a Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) specification which allows network
administrators to identify and manage connection faults. Through discovery and verification of the
path, CFM can detect, analyze and isolate connectivity faults in bridged LANs.
32.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup screen lets you ping an IP address or trace the route
packets take to a host (Section 32.3 on page 263).
• The 802.1ag screen lets you perform CFM actions (Section 32.5 on page 265).
• The OAM Ping Test screen lets you send an ATM OAM (Operation, Administration and
Maintenance) packet to verify the connectivity of a specific PVC. (Section 32.5 on page 265).
32.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
How CFM Works
A Maintenance Association (MA) defines a VLAN and associated Maintenance End Point (MEP) ports
on the device under a Maintenance Domain (MD) level. An MEP port has the ability to send
Connectivity Check Messages (CCMs) and get other MEP ports information from neighbor devices’
CCMs within an MA.
CFM provides two tests to discover connectivity faults.
• Loopback test - checks if the MEP port receives its Loop Back Response (LBR) from its target
after it sends the Loop Back Message (LBM). If no response is received, there might be a
connectivity fault between them.
• Link trace test - provides additional connectivity fault analysis to get more information on where
the fault is. If an MEP port does not respond to the source MEP, this may indicate a fault.
Administrators can take further action to check and resume services from the fault according to
the line connectivity status report.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
262
Chapter 32 Diagnostic
32.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup
Use this screen to ping, traceroute, or nslookup an IP address. Click Maintenance > Diagnostic >
Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup to open the screen shown next.
Figure 140 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 107 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
URL or IP
Address
Type the IP address of a computer that you want to perform ping, traceroute, or
nslookup in order to test a connection.
Ping
Click this to ping the IP address that you entered.
TraceRoute
Click this button to perform the traceroute function. This determines the path a
packet takes to the specified computer.
Nslookup
Click this button to perform a DNS lookup on the IP address of a computer you
enter.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
263
Chapter 32 Diagnostic
32.4 802.1ag
Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > 8.2.1ag to open the following screen. Use this screen to
perform CFM actions.
Figure 141 802.1ag
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 108 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management
Maintenance
Domain (MD) Level
Select a level (0-7) under which you want to create an MA.
Destination MAC
Address
Enter the target device’s MAC address to which the ZyXEL Device performs a
CFM loopback test.
802.1Q VLAN ID
Type a VLAN ID (0-4095) for this MA.
VDSL Traffic Type
264
Loopback Message
(LBM)
This shows how many Loop Back Messages (LBMs) are sent and if there is any
inorder or outorder Loop Back Response (LBR) received from a remote MEP.
Linktrace Message
(LTM)
This shows the destination MAC address in the Link Trace Response (LTR).
Send Loopback
Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LBM (Loop Back Message)
to a specified remote end point.
Send Linktrace
Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LTMs (Link Trace Messages)
to a specified remote end point.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 32 Diagnostic
32.5 OAM Ping Test
Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Test to open the screen shown next. Use this
screen to perform an OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) F4 or F5 loopback test on a
PVC. The ZyXEL Device sends an OAM F4 or F5 packet to the DSLAM or ATM switch and then
returns it to the ZyXEL Device. The test result then displays in the text box.
ATM sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate. The terminology for virtual
circuits is as follows:
•
Virtual Channel (VC)
Logical connections between ATM devices
•
Virtual Path (VP)
A bundle of virtual channels
•
Virtual Circuits
A series of virtual paths between circuit end points
Figure 142 Virtual Circuit Topology
Think of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires. The cable connects two points and
wires within the cable provide individual circuits between the two points. In an ATM cell header, a
VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) identifies a link formed by a virtual path; a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) identifies a channel within a virtual path. A series of virtual paths make up a virtual
circuit.
F4 cells operate at the virtual path (VP) level, while F5 cells operate at the virtual channel (VC)
level. F4 cells use the same VPI as the user data cells on VP connections, but use different
predefined VCI values. F5 cells use the same VPI and VCI as the user data cells on the VC
connections, and are distinguished from data cells by a predefinded Payload Type Identifier (PTI) in
the cell header. Both F4 flows and F5 flows are bidirectional and have two types.
• segment F4 flows (VCI=3)
• end-to-end F4 flows (VCI=4)
• segment F5 flows (PTI=100)
• end-to-end F5 flows (PTI=101)
OAM F4 or F5 tests are used to check virtual path or virtual channel availability between two DSL
devices. Segment flows are terminated at the connecting point which terminates a VP or VC
segment. End-to-end flows are terminated at the end point of a VP or VC connection, where an ATM
link is terminated. Segment loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of a PVC to the nearest
neighboring ATM device. End-to-end loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of an end-to-end
PVC.
Note: The DSLAM to which the ZyXEL Device is connected must also support ATM F4 and/
or F5 to use this test.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
265
Chapter 32 Diagnostic
Note: This screen is available only when you configure an ATM layer-2 interface.
Figure 143 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Test
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 109 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping Test
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Select a PVC on which you want to perform the loopback test.
266
F4 segment
Press this to perform an OAM F4 segment loopback test.
F4 end-end
Press this to perform an OAM F4 end-to-end loopback test.
F5 segment
Press this to perform an OAM F5 segment loopback test.
F5 end-end
Press this to perform an OAM F5 end-to-end loopback test.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
33
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential
problems are divided into the following categories.
• Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
• ZyXEL Device Access and Login
• Internet Access
33.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The ZyXEL Device does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
Make sure the ZyXEL Device is turned on.
Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the ZyXEL Device.
Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the ZyXEL Device and plugged in to an
appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.
Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on.
If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.5 on page 25.
Check the hardware connections.
Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on.
If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
267
Chapter 33 Troubleshooting
33.2 ZyXEL Device Access and Login
I forgot the IP address for the ZyXEL Device.
The default LAN IP address is 192.168.1.1.
If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the ZyXEL
Device by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most
Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the
Default Gateway might be the IP address of the ZyXEL Device (it depends on the network), so
enter this IP address in your Internet browser.
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.6 on page
26.
I forgot the password.
The default admin password is 1234.
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.6 on page
26.
I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.
Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.
• If you changed the IP address (Section 8.2 on page 117), use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I
forgot the IP address for the ZyXEL Device.
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See Section
1.5 on page 25.
Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScript and Java
enabled. See Appendix C on page 309.
Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the ZyXEL Device with the default IP
address. See Section 1.6 on page 26.
If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced
suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
268
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 33 Troubleshooting
• Make sure you have logged out of any earlier management sessions using the same user account
even if they were through a different interface or using a different browser.
• Try to access the ZyXEL Device using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the
ZyXEL Device, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the
ZyXEL Device does not respond to HTTP.
• If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is
connected to an ETHERNET port.\
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the ZyXEL Device.
Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default admin password is 1234. The field
is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the ZyXEL Device.
Log out of the ZyXEL Device in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out.
Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on.
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 33.1 on page
267.
I cannot Telnet to the ZyXEL Device.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web
configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
Check the service control settings for Telnet. See Chapter 20 on page 223.
I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload
new firmware.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web
configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
Check the service control settings for FTP. See Chapter 20 on page 223.
33.3 Internet Access
I cannot access the Internet.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
269
Chapter 33 Troubleshooting
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick
Start Guide for hardware connections information and Section 1.5 on page 25 for LED behaviors.
Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the Network Settings >
Broadband screen. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure that you enabled the wireless LAN in
the ZyXEL Device and your wireless client and that the wireless settings in the wireless client are
the same as the settings in the ZyXEL Device.
Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide to
connect them again.
If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
I cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection.
Make sure you have the DSL port connected to a telephone jack (or the DSL or modem jack on a
splitter if you have one).
Make sure you configured a proper DSL WAN interface (Network Settings > Broadband screen)
with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled.
Check that the LAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the DSL
connection (Network Settings > Interface Group).
If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in
the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP’s DHCP server.
I cannot access the Internet through an Ethernet WAN connection.
Make sure you have the ETHERNET WAN port connected to a broadband modem or router in your
network.
Make sure you configured a proper Ethernet WAN interface (Network Settings > Broadband
screen) with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled.
Check that the LAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the Ethernet
WAN connection (Network Settings > Interface Group).
If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in
the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP’s DHCP server.
I cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection.
270
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 33 Troubleshooting
ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time. You can only use one type of DSL
connection, either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time.
I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the ZyXEL Device),
but my Internet connection is not available anymore.
Your session with the ZyXEL Device may have expired. Try logging into the ZyXEL Device again.
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick
Start Guide for hardware connections information and Section 1.5 on page 25 for LED behaviors.
Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on.
If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
33.4 Wireless Internet Access
What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection? How can I solve this
problem?
The following factors may cause interference:
• Obstacles: walls, ceilings, furniture, and so on.
• Building Materials: metal doors, aluminum studs.
• Electrical devices: microwaves, monitors, electric motors, cordless phones, and other wireless
devices.
To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection, you can:
• Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low.
• Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding
wireless electronics such as cordless phones.
• Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles (such as walls and ceilings) between the AP and
the wireless client.
• Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously, or add
additional APs if necessary.
• Try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. If the
wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information, it may have too many programs open
that use the Internet.
What wireless security modes does my ZyXEL Device support?
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
271
Chapter 33 Troubleshooting
Wireless security is vital to your network. It protects communications between wireless stations,
access points and the wired network.
The available security modes in your ZyXEL device are as follows:
• WPA2-PSK: (recommended) This uses a pre-shared key with the WPA2 standard.
• WPA-PSK: This has the device use either WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depending on which security
mode the wireless client uses.
• WPA2: WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption,
authentication and key management than WPA. It requires the use of a RADIUS server and is
mostly used in business networks.
• WPA: Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. It requires the use
of a RADIUS server and is mostly used in business networks.
• WEP: Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the
wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private.
272
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
C HAPTER
34
Product Specifications
The following tables summarize the ZyXEL Device’s hardware and firmware features.
34.1 Hardware Specifications
Table 110 Hardware Specifications
Dimensions
210 (L) x 154 (W) x 40 (H) mm (without external antenna)
Weight
495g (without external antenna)
Power Adaptor Output
12 V 1.5 A
Power Adaptor Input
100-240V AC, 50/60Hz
RESET Button
Restores factory defaults
WLAN/WPS Button
If the wireless network is turned off, press the WLAN/WPS button on the
front of the ZyXEL Device for two seconds. Once the WLAN/WPS LED
turns green, the wireless network is active.
While the WLAN/WPS LED is green press the WLAN/WPS button for
five seconds and release it to enable WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup).
To turn off the wireless network, press the WLAN/WPS button on the
front of the ZyXEL Device for one to five seconds. The WLAN/WPS LED
turns off when the wireless network is off.
Antennas
Two: One detachable external, 2dBi antenna and one internal, 2dBi
antenna.
Built-in Switch
Four auto-negotiating, auto MDI/MDI-X 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 Ethernet ports
DSL Port
One RJ-11 connector for DSL over POTS
Gigabit Ethernet WAN
Port
One RJ-45 connector for GBE WAN
HomePNA Coaxial Port
One port for HPNA v3.1 access, coax F type connector
USB Ports
One USB v2.0 port for file sharing
Operation Temperature
0º C ~ 40º C
Storage Temperature
-20º ~ 60º C
Operation Humidity
20% ~ 85% RH (non-condensing)
Storage Humidity
20% ~ 90% RH (non-condensing)
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
273
Chapter 34 Product Specifications
34.2 Firmware Specifications
Table 111 Firmware Specifications
Default IP Address
192.168.1.1
Default Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0 (24 bits)
Default User Name
admin
Default Password
1234
DHCP Server IP Pool
192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.254
Static Routes
16
Device Management
Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on
the ZyXEL Device.
Wireless Functionality
Allow the IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and/or IEEE 802.11n wireless
clients to connect to the ZyXEL Device wirelessly. Enable wireless security
(WEP, WPA(2), WPA(2)-PSK) and/or MAC filtering to protect your wireless
network.
(wireless devices only)
Firmware Upgrade
Download new firmware (when available) from the web site and use the
web configurator to put it on the ZyXEL Device.
Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model!
Configuration Backup &
Restoration
Make a copy of the ZyXEL Device’s configuration. You can put it back on
the ZyXEL Device later if you decide to revert back to an earlier
configuration.
HomePNA (Home
Phoneline Networking
Alliance, also known as
HPNA) 3.1
Extend your Internet connection to the coaxial outlets in your house. HPNA
is a home networking technology for carrying data over existing coaxial
cables and telephone wiring.
Port Forwarding
If you have a server (mail or web server for example) on your network,
you can use this feature to let people access it from the Internet.
DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol)
Use this feature to have the ZyXEL Device assign IP addresses, an IP
default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network. Your
device can also act as a surrogate DHCP server (DHCP Relay) where it
relays IP address assignment from the actual real DHCP server to the
clients.
Dynamic DNS Support
With Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can use a fixed
URL with a dynamic IP address. You must register for this service with a
Dynamic DNS service provider.
IP Multicast
IP multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers. The
ZyXEL Device supports versions 2 and 3 of IGMP (Internet Group
Management Protocol) used to join multicast groups (see RFC 2236).
Time and Date
Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on
your ZyXEL Device. You can also set the time manually. These dates and
times are then used in logs.
Logs
Use logs for troubleshooting. You can send logs from the ZyXEL Device to
an external syslog server.
Universal Plug and Play
(UPnP)
A UPnP-enabled device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP
address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network.
QoS (Quality of Service) You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth
and giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular
computers.
274
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 34 Product Specifications
Table 111 Firmware Specifications (continued)
Remote Management
This allows you to decide whether a service (HTTPS or FTP traffic for
example) from a computer on a network (LAN or WAN for example) can
access the ZyXEL Device.
PPPoE Support
(RFC2516)
PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) emulates a dial-up
connection. It allows your ISP to use their existing network configuration
with newer broadband technologies such as ADSL. The PPPoE driver on
your device is transparent to the computers on the LAN, which see only
Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE thus saving you from having to
manage PPPoE clients on individual computers.
Other PPPoE Features
PPPoE idle time out
PPPoE dial on demand
Packet Filters
Your device’s packet filtering function allows added network security and
management.
VDSL Standards
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ITU-T G.993.2 (VDSL2)
ITU-T G.993.1 (VDSL1)
ITU-T G.994.1 (G.hs)
ITU-T G.997.1
Pass TR-114(Still Need test for Single pair)
Support VDSL band plan, Annex A, Annex B, 997, 998
Support VDSL profiles, 8a/b/c/d, 12a/b and 17a
Support U0 band for long reach
Maximum data rate (DS/US): 100Mbps/45Mbps
Rate adaption
SRA (Seamless Rate Adaption)
UPBO (Upstream power back-off)
VDSL OAM communication channels
INP value up to 16
Trellis coding
Erasure and Broadcom PhyR PHY Level Retransmission Technology
PTM mode
ADSL Standards
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
G.992.1(G.dmt) Annex A, B compliant
G.992.2(G.lite), Annex A compliant
ANSI T1.413 compliant
G.992.3(ADSL2) compliant, Annex A, B, L and M
G.992.5(ADSL2+) compliant, Annex A, B, and M
I.432 ATM physical layer compliant
Reach-Extended ADSL (RE ADSL),
SRA (Seamless Rate Adaptation)
Rate adaptation
ADSL physical connection ATM AAL5 (ATM Adaptation Layer type 5)
Support multi-protocol over AAL5 (RFC2684/1483)
PPP over ATM AAL5 (RFC2364)
PPPoE (RFC 2516)
MAC Encapsulation Routing
Support VC-based and LLC-based multiplexing
Support up to 8 PVCs
ATM traffic shaping (CBR, VBR-rt/nrt, UBR )
I.610 F4/F5 OAM
Upstream power backoff (UPBO)
Broadcom PhyR, PHY Level Retransmission Technology
Broadcom Nitro mode, ATM header compression
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
275
Chapter 34 Product Specifications
Table 111 Firmware Specifications (continued)
Other Protocol Support
PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) link layer protocol
Transparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols
RIP I/RIP II
ICMP
ATM QoS
IP Multicasting IGMP v2 and v3
IGMP Proxy
Management
Embedded Web Configurator
Remote Firmware Upgrade
Embedded FTP/TFTP Server for firmware upgrade and configuration file
backup and restore
Syslog
TR-069
TR-064
The following list, which is not exhaustive, illustrates the standards supported in the ZyXEL Device.
Table 112 Standards Supported
276
STANDARD
DESCRIPTION
RFC 1058
RIP-1 (Routing Information Protocol)
RFC 1112
IGMP v1
RFC 1305
Network Time Protocol (NTP version 3)
RFC 1483
Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5
RFC 1631
IP Network Address Translator (NAT)
RFC 1661
The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
RFC 1723
RIP-2 (Routing Information Protocol)
RFC 2236
Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2.
RFC 2364
PPP over AAL5 (PPP over ATM over ADSL)
RFC 2516
A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet (PPPoE)
RFC 2684
Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5
RFC 2766
Network Address Translation - Protocol
IEEE 802.11
Also known by the brand Wi-Fi, denotes a set of Wireless LAN/WLAN
standards developed by working group 11 of the IEEE LAN/MAN
Standards Committee (IEEE 802).
IEEE 802.11b
Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band
IEEE 802.11g
Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band
IEEE 802.11d
Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks: Media Access
Control (MAC) Bridges
IEEE 802.11x
Port Based Network Access Control.
IEEE 802.11e QoS
IEEE 802.11 e Wireless LAN for Quality of Service
ANSI T1.413, Issue 2
Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) standard.
G dmt(G.992.1)
G.992.1 Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) Transceivers
ITU G.992.1 (G.DMT)
ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Chapter 34 Product Specifications
Table 112 Standards Supported (continued)
STANDARD
DESCRIPTION
ITU G.992.2 (G. Lite)
ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation.
ITU G.992.3 (G.dmt.bis)
ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2) that extends the capability of
basic ADSL in data rates.
ITU G.992.4 (G.lite.bis)
ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2) that extends the capability of
basic ADSL in data rates.
ITU G.992.5 (ADSL2+)
ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2+) that extends the capability of
basic ADSL by doubling the number of downstream bits.
ITU-T G.993.2 (VDSL2)
ITU standard that defines VDSL2.
TR-069
DSL Forum Standard for CPE Wan Management.
TR-064
DSL Forum LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
277
Chapter 34 Product Specifications
278
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP/IP installed.
Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP/Vista, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions
of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP/IP on your
computer. Windows 3.1 requires the purchase of a third-party TCP/IP application package.
TCP/IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and
later operating systems.
After the appropriate TCP/IP components are installed, configure the TCP/IP settings in order to
"communicate" with your network.
If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment, make sure that your
computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device’s LAN port.
Windows 95/98/Me
Click Start, Settings, Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to open the Network
window.
Figure 144 WIndows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
279
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Installing Components
The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components. You need a
network adapter, the TCP/IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks.
If you need the adapter:
In the Network window, click Add.
Select Adapter and then click Add.
Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK.
If you need TCP/IP:
In the Network window, click Add.
Select Protocol and then click Add.
Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers.
Select TCP/IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK.
If you need Client for Microsoft Networks:
Click Add.
Select Client and then click Add.
Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers.
Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK.
Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect.
Configuring
In the Network window Configuration tab, select your network adapter's TCP/IP entry and click
Properties
Click the IP Address tab.
• If your IP address is dynamic, select Obtain an IP address automatically.
280
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• If you have a static IP address, select Specify an IP address and type your information into
the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields.
Figure 145 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address
Click the DNS Configuration tab.
• If you do not know your DNS information, select Disable DNS.
• If you know your DNS information, select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields
below (you may not need to fill them all in).
Figure 146 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
281
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Click the Gateway tab.
• If you do not know your gateway’s IP address, remove previously installed gateways.
• If you have a gateway IP address, type it in the New gateway field and click Add.
Click OK to save and close the TCP/IP Properties window.
Click OK to close the Network window. Insert the Windows CD if prompted.
Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer when prompted.
Verifying Settings
Click Start and then Run.
In the Run window, type "winipcfg" and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window.
Select your network adapter. You should see your computer's IP address, subnet mask and default
gateway.
Windows 2000/NT/XP
The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme.
Click start (Start in Windows 2000/NT), Settings, Control Panel.
Figure 147 Windows XP: Start Menu
282
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
In the Control Panel, double-click Network Connections (Network and Dial-up Connections
in Windows 2000/NT).
Figure 148 Windows XP: Control Panel
Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties.
Figure 149 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
283
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) (under the General tab in Win XP) and then click Properties.
Figure 150 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties
The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens (the General tab in Windows XP).
• If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically.
• If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address,
Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields.
284
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• Click Advanced.
Figure 151 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP
Settings tab and click OK.
Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:
• In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add.
• In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask,
and then click Add.
• Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add.
• Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default
gateways.
• In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To
manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic
metric check box and type a metric in Metric.
• Click Add.
• Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
285
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• Click OK when finished.
Figure 152 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties
In the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window (the General tab in Windows XP):
• Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP
address(es).
• If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server
addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields.
286
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order
them.
Figure 153 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
Click Close (OK in Windows 2000/NT) to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
10
Close the Network Connections window (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows
2000/NT).
11 Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt.
In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open
Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support
tab.
Windows Vista
This section shows screens from Windows Vista Enterprise Version 6.0.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
287
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Click the Start icon, Control Panel.
Figure 154 Windows Vista: Start Menu
In the Control Panel, double-click Network and Internet.
Figure 155 Windows Vista: Control Panel
Click Network and Sharing Center.
Figure 156 Windows Vista: Network And Internet
288
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Click Manage network connections.
Figure 157 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center
Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties.
Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying
that it needs your permission to continue.
Figure 158 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
289
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click Properties.
Figure 159 Windows Vista: Local Area Connection Properties
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens (the General tab).
• If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically.
• If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP address and fill in the IP address,
Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields.
290
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• Click Advanced.
Figure 160 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP
Settings tab and click OK.
Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:
• In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add.
• In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask,
and then click Add.
• Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add.
• Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default
gateways.
• In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To
manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic
metric check box and type a metric in Metric.
• Click Add.
• Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
291
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• Click OK when finished.
Figure 161 Windows Vista: Advanced TCP/IP Properties
In the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window, (the General tab):
• Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP
address(es).
• If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server
addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields.
292
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order
them.
Figure 162 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
10 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window.
11 Click Close to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
12
Close the Network Connections window.
13 Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt.
In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open
Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support
tab.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
293
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Macintosh OS 8/9
Click the Apple menu, Control Panel and double-click TCP/IP to open the TCP/IP Control
Panel.
Figure 163 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu
294
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Select Ethernet built-in from the Connect via list.
Figure 164 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP
For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP Server from the Configure: list.
For statically assigned settings, do the following:
• From the Configure box, select Manually.
• Type your IP address in the IP Address box.
• Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box.
• Type the IP address of your ZyXEL Device in the Router address box.
Close the TCP/IP Control Panel.
Click Save if prompted, to save changes to your configuration.
Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties in the TCP/IP Control Panel window.
Macintosh OS X
Click the Apple menu, and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window.
Figure 165 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu
Click Network in the icon bar.
• Select Automatic from the Location list.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
295
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• Select Built-in Ethernet from the Show list.
• Click the TCP/IP tab.
For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure list.
Figure 166 Macintosh OS X: Network
For statically assigned settings, do the following:
• From the Configure box, select Manually.
• Type your IP address in the IP Address box.
• Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box.
• Type the IP address of your ZyXEL Device in the Router address box.
Click Apply Now and close the window.
Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties in the Network window.
296
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Linux
This section shows you how to configure your computer’s TCP/IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9.0.
Procedure, screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release
version.
Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator.
Using the K Desktop Environment (KDE)
Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE.
Click the Red Hat button (located on the bottom left corner), select System Setting and click
Network.
Figure 167 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
297
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Double-click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure. The Ethernet Device
General screen displays as shown.
Figure 168 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General
• If you have a dynamic IP address, click Automatically obtain IP address settings with and
select dhcp from the drop down list.
• If you have a static IP address, click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address,
Subnet mask, and Default Gateway Address fields.
Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen.
If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration
screen. Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided.
Figure 169 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS
298
Click the Devices tab.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Click the Activate button to apply the changes. The following screen displays. Click Yes to save
the changes in all screens.
Figure 170 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate
After the network card restart process is complete, make sure the Status is Active in the Network
Configuration screen.
Using Configuration Files
Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address.
Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer, locate the ifconfig-eth0
configuration file (where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card). Open the configuration file with
any plain text editor.
• If you have a dynamic IP address, enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO= field. The following figure
shows an example.
Figure 171 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0
DEVICE=eth0
ONBOOT=yes
BOOTPROTO=dhcp
USERCTL=no
PEERDNS=yes
TYPE=Ethernet
• If you have a static IP address, enter static in the BOOTPROTO= field. Type IPADDR= followed
by the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) and type NETMASK= followed by the subnet
mask. The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192.168.1.10
and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
Figure 172 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0
DEVICE=eth0
ONBOOT=yes
BOOTPROTO=static
IPADDR=192.168.1.10
NETMASK=255.255.255.0
USERCTL=no
PEERDNS=yes
TYPE=Ethernet
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
299
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
If you know your DNS server IP address(es), enter the DNS server information in the resolv.conf
file in the /etc directory. The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP
addresses are specified.
Figure 173 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf
nameserver 172.23.5.1
nameserver 172.23.5.2
After you edit and save the configuration files, you must restart the network card. Enter ./network
restart in the /etc/rc.d/init.d directory. The following figure shows an example.
Figure 174 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card
[root@localhost init.d]# network restart
Shutting down interface eth0:
Shutting down loopback interface:
Setting network parameters:
Bringing up loopback interface:
Bringing up interface eth0:
[OK]
[OK]
[OK]
[OK]
[OK]
Verifying Settings
Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP/IP properties.
Figure 175 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties
[root@localhost]# ifconfig
eth0
Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:50:BA:72:5B:44
inet addr:172.23.19.129 Bcast:172.23.19.255 Mask:255.255.255.0
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:717 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:13 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
RX bytes:730412 (713.2 Kb) TX bytes:1570 (1.5 Kb)
Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1000
[root@localhost]#
300
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
IP Addresses and Subnetting
This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks.
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including
computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the
network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use
subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
Introduction to IP Addresses
One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host ID. In the same
way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common
network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has
its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets
to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are
delivered.
Structure
An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example,
192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary
number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation).
Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in
decimal.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
301
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets (192.168.1) are
the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID.
Figure 176 Network Number and Host ID
How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according
to the subnet mask.
Subnet Masks
A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are
part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term “subnet” is short for “sub-network”.
A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a “1” then the corresponding bit in the IP
address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is “0” then the corresponding bit
in the IP address is part of the host ID.
The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host
ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal).
Table 113 Subnet Masks
1ST OCTET: 2ND
OCTET:
(192)
(168)
3RD
OCTET:
4TH OCTET
(1)
(2)
IP Address (Binary)
11000000
10101000
00000001
00000010
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
Network Number
11000000
10101000
00000001
Host ID
00000010
By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the
leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits.
302
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a “1” value).
For example, an “8-bit mask” means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24
bits are zeroes.
Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following
examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks.
Table 114 Subnet Masks
BINARY
DECIMAL
1ST
OCTET
2ND
OCTET
3RD
OCTET
4TH OCTET
8-bit mask
11111111
00000000
00000000
00000000
255.0.0.0
16-bit mask
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
255.255.0.0
24-bit mask
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
255.255.255.0
29-bit mask
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111000
255.255.255.248
Network Size
The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have
on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of
remaining host ID bits.
An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network (192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit
subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that
network (192.168.1.255 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example).
As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of
possible hosts in a network as follows:
Table 115 Maximum Host Numbers
SUBNET MASK
HOST ID SIZE
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS
24
8 bits
255.0.0.0
24 bits
16 bits
255.255.0.0
16 bits
216 – 2
65534
24 bits
255.255.255.0
8 bits
28 – 2
254
29 bits
255.255.255.24
3 bits
–2
2 –2
16777214
Notation
Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a
continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the
number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a “/”
followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address.
For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask 255.255.255.128.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
303
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations.
Table 116 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation
SUBNET MASK
ALTERNATIVE
NOTATION
LAST OCTET
(BINARY)
LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL)
255.255.255.0
/24
0000 0000
255.255.255.128
/25
1000 0000
128
255.255.255.192
/26
1100 0000
192
255.255.255.224
/27
1110 0000
224
255.255.255.240
/28
1111 0000
240
255.255.255.248
/29
1111 1000
248
255.255.255.252
/30
1111 1100
252
Subnetting
You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example
a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the
company network for security reasons.
In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address
(192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum
of 28 – 2 or 254 possible hosts.
The following figure shows the company network before subnetting.
Figure 177 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting
You can “borrow” one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate subnetworks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or /25).
The “borrowed” host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25
and 192.168.1.128 /25.
304
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two subnetworks, A and B.
Figure 178 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting
In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of 27 – 2 or 126
possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet’s address itself, all ones is the subnet’s
broadcast address).
192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask
255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to
an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126.
Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254.
Example: Four Subnets
The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two
subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to “borrow” two host ID
bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits
(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192.
Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all
zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnet’s broadcast address).
Table 117 Subnet 1
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address (Decimal)
192.168.1.
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
00000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
305
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Table 117 Subnet 1 (continued)
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.0
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
Table 118 Subnet 2
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address
192.168.1.
64
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
01000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.64
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126
Table 119 Subnet 3
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT VALUE
IP Address
192.168.1.
128
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
10000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190
Table 120 Subnet 4
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT VALUE
IP Address
192.168.1.
192
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
11000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254
Example: Eight Subnets
Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and 111).
The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet.
Table 121 Eight Subnets
306
SUBNET
SUBNET
ADDRESS
FIRST ADDRESS
LAST
ADDRESS
BROADCAST
ADDRESS
30
31
32
33
62
63
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Table 121 Eight Subnets (continued)
SUBNET
SUBNET
ADDRESS
FIRST ADDRESS
LAST
ADDRESS
BROADCAST
ADDRESS
64
65
94
95
96
97
126
127
128
129
158
159
160
161
190
191
192
193
222
223
224
225
254
255
Subnet Planning
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number.
Table 122 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK
NO. SUBNETS
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
255.255.255.128 (/25)
126
255.255.255.192 (/26)
62
255.255.255.224 (/27)
30
255.255.255.240 (/28)
16
14
255.255.255.248 (/29)
32
255.255.255.252 (/30)
64
255.255.255.254 (/31)
128
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number.
Table 123 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK
NO. SUBNETS
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
255.255.128.0 (/17)
32766
255.255.192.0 (/18)
16382
255.255.224.0 (/19)
8190
255.255.240.0 (/20)
16
4094
255.255.248.0 (/21)
32
2046
255.255.252.0 (/22)
64
1022
255.255.254.0 (/23)
128
510
255.255.255.0 (/24)
256
254
255.255.255.128 (/25)
512
126
10
255.255.255.192 (/26)
1024
62
11
255.255.255.224 (/27)
2048
30
12
255.255.255.240 (/28)
4096
14
13
255.255.255.248 (/29)
8192
14
255.255.255.252 (/30)
16384
15
255.255.255.254 (/31)
32768
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
307
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Configuring IP Addresses
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your
network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in
selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user
account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this
is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to
192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses
specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You
must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the ZyXEL Device.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your ZyXEL Device that is
easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network
is using that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your ZyXEL Device will
compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need
to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do
otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the
Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to
the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has
reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0
• 172.16.0.0
— 10.255.255.255
— 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private
network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP
can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are
part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the
appropriate IP addresses.
Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the
guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address
Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space.
308
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java
Permissions
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device.
• JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer
versions may vary.
Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers
You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device.
Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow
pop-up blocking and create an exception for your device’s IP address.
Disable Pop-up Blockers
In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker.
Figure 179 Pop-up Blocker
You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab.
In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
309
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any
web pop-up blockers you may have enabled.
Figure 180 Internet Options: Privacy
Click Apply to save this setting.
Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions
Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps.
310
In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
Select Settings…to open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen.
Figure 181 Internet Options: Privacy
Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the
prefix “http://”. For example, http://192.168.167.1.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
311
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites.
Figure 182 Pop-up Blocker Settings
Click Close to return to the Privacy screen.
Click Apply to save this setting.
JavaScripts
If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts
are allowed.
312
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
Figure 183 Internet Options: Security
Click the Custom Level... button.
Scroll down to Scripting.
Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
313
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
Click OK to close the window.
Figure 184 Security Settings - Java Scripting
Java Permissions
314
From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
Click the Custom Level... button.
Scroll down to Microsoft VM.
Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
Click OK to close the window.
Figure 185 Security Settings - Java
JAVA (Sun)
From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab.
Make sure that Use Java 2 for  under Java (Sun) is selected.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
315
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
Click OK to close the window.
Figure 186 Java (Sun)
Mozilla Firefox
Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary.
You can enable Java, Javascript and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then click Options in the
screen that appears.
Figure 187 Mozilla Firefox: Tools > Options
316
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
Click Content.to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen.
Figure 188 Mozilla Firefox Content Security
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
317
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
318
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Wireless LANs
Wireless LAN Topologies
This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies.
Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration
The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of
computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within
range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an
ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example
of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN.
Figure 189 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network
BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a
wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless
client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
319
Appendix D Wireless LANs
disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with
each other.
Figure 190 Basic Service Set
ESS
An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access
point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection
between APs is called a Distribution System (DS).
This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only
provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the
immediate neighborhood.
320
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated
wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate.
Figure 191 Infrastructure WLAN
Channel
A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data.
Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your
region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce
interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing
interference and degrading performance.
Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should
be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For
example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to
select a channel between 6 or 11.
RTS/CTS
A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not
within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are
within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
321
Appendix D Wireless LANs
cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore,
they are considered hidden from each other.
Figure 192
RTS/CTS
When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the
channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of
data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations.
RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest
size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is
invoked.
When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station
that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS (Request To Send) message to the AP for
permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other
stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms
with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission.
Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and
the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the
RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be
fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could
negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy.
Fragmentation Threshold
A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes)
that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data
frames.
A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while
you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference.
322
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you
set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames
will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b
adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point (and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or
lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has several intermediate rate steps between the
maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:
Table 124 IEEE 802.11g
DATA RATE (MBPS)
MODULATION
DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed)
DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)
5.5 / 11
CCK (Complementary Code Keying)
6/9/12/18/24/36/48/
54
OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)
Wireless Security Overview
Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless
clients, access points and the wired network.
Wireless security methods available on the ZyXEL Device are data encryption, wireless client
authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the ZyXEL Device identity.
The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on
your ZyXEL Device.
Table 125 Wireless Security Levels
SECURITY
LEVEL
Least
Secure
SECURITY TYPE
Unique SSID (Default)
Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled
MAC Address Filtering
WEP Encryption
IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)
WPA2
Most Secure
Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the ZyXEL Device and on all
wireless clients that you want to associate with it.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
323
Appendix D Wireless LANs
IEEE 802.1x
In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to
support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It
is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x
are:
• User based identification that allows for roaming.
• Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for
centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server.
• Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional
authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless
clients.
RADIUS
RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and
accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server
handles the following tasks:
• Authentication
Determines the identity of the users.
• Authorization
Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the
network.
• Accounting
Keeps track of the client’s network activity.
RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the
wireless client and the network RADIUS server.
Types of RADIUS Messages
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS
server for user authentication:
• Access-Request
Sent by an access point requesting authentication.
• Access-Reject
Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access.
• Access-Accept
Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access.
• Access-Challenge
Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point
sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message.
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS
server for user accounting:
324
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
• Accounting-Request
Sent by the access point requesting accounting.
• Accounting-Response
Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting.
In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret
key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the
shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from
unauthorized access.
Types of EAP Authentication
This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and
LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types.
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE
802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP
to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a
RADIUS server perform authentication.
The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that
supports IEEE 802.1x.
For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain
the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate (also called digital IDs) can be used
to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate
owner.
EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5)
MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server
sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client ‘proves’ that it knows the password by
encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in
plain text.
However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get
the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the
authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an
authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication.
Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You
must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption.
EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)
With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for
mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of
the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done
in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive
attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender’s identity.
However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which
imposes a management overhead.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
325
Appendix D Wireless LANs
EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service)
EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the serverside authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending
username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client
authentication, EAP-TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP,
CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2.
PEAP (Protected EAP)
Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then
use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the
clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5,
EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is
implemented only by Cisco.
LEAP
LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x.
Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the
wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is
generated each time reauthentication is performed.
If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless
security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while
dynamic WEP is enabled.
Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic
keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public
deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a
comparison of the features of authentication types.
Table 126 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types
326
EAP-MD5
EAP-TLS
EAP-TTLS
PEAP
LEAP
Mutual Authentication
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Certificate – Client
No
Yes
Optional
Optional
No
Certificate – Server
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Dynamic Key Exchange
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Credential Integrity
None
Strong
Strong
Strong
Moderate
Deployment Difficulty
Easy
Hard
Moderate
Moderate
Moderate
Client Identity Protection
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
WPA and WPA2
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a
wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management
than WPA.
Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user
authentication.
If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use
WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use
WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into
each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless
client will be granted access to a WLAN.
If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on
whether you have an external RADIUS server or not.
Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less
secure than WPA or WPA2.
Encryption
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity
Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons, but
offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter
mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP).
TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server.
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm
called Rijndael. They both include a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check
(MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying
mechanism.
WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is
never used twice.
The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key
hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption
keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless
clients. This all happens in the background automatically.
The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets,
altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the
receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is
assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped.
By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity
checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi
network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network.
The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference
between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific
credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
327
Appendix D Wireless LANs
password-guessing attacks but it’s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent,
single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal
encryption keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of
WEP)
User Authentication
WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate
wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange
messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a
network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and
pre-authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless
devices.
Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication
with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not
need to go with the authentication process again.
Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an
AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it.
Wireless Client WPA Supplicants
A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless
client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch
for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client.
The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built-in "Zero
Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it.
WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812),
and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server
looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system.
328
The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server.
The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies
network access accordingly.
A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS
server and the client.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and
management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The
keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and
the wireless clients.
Figure 193 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
WPA(2)-PSK Application Example
A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows.
First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must
consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and
symbols).
The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password
matches.
The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not
sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID.
The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information
exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data
exchanged between them.
Figure 194 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
329
Appendix D Wireless LANs
Security Parameters Summary
Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each
authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on
how you configure these security features.
Table 127 Wireless Security Relational Matrix
AUTHENTICATION
ENCRYPTIO
METHOD/ KEY
MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL N METHOD
ENTER
MANUAL KEY
IEEE 802.1X
Open
No
Disable
None
Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Open
Shared
WEP
WEP
No
Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes
Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Yes
Disable
No
Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes
Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Yes
Disable
WPA
TKIP/AES
No
Enable
WPA-PSK
TKIP/AES
Yes
Disable
WPA2
TKIP/AES
No
Enable
WPA2-PSK
TKIP/AES
Yes
Disable
Antenna Overview
An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to
the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air. The antenna also operates in reverse by
capturing RF signals from the air.
Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN.
Antenna Characteristics
Frequency
An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz (IEEE 802.11a)
is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN
Radiation Pattern
A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna’s coverage
area.
Antenna Gain
Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width.
Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications.
For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately
330
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of
approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment.
Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal
power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna
that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the
antenna provides.
Types of Antennas for WLAN
There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications.
• Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The
coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room
environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage
areas with multiple access points.
• Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light
from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles
typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to 120 degrees (less directional). Directional
antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications.
Positioning Antennas
In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In
point-to–point application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to
each other to attain the best performance.
For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For
omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP
application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible.
For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
331
Appendix D Wireless LANs
332
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Services
The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port
numbers.
• Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a
different one, if you like.
• Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service
uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP
protocol number, not the port number.
• Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol.
• If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number.
• If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.
• Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations
in which this service is used.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
333
Appendix E Services
Table 128 Examples of Services
NAME
334
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
AH (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined
51
The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header)
tunneling protocol uses this service.
AIM
TCP
5190
AOL’s Internet Messenger service.
AUTH
TCP
113
Authentication protocol used by some
servers.
BGP
TCP
179
Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT
UDP
68
DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER
UDP
67
DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME
TCP/UDP
7648
TCP/UDP
24032
A popular videoconferencing solution from
White Pines Software.
DNS
TCP/UDP
53
Domain Name Server, a service that
matches web names (for instance
www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers.
ESP
(IPSEC_TUNNEL)
User-Defined
50
The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security
Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this
service.
FINGER
TCP
79
Finger is a UNIX or Internet related
command that can be used to find out if a
user is logged on.
FTP
TCP
20
TCP
21
File Transfer Protocol, a program to enable
fast transfer of files, including large files
that may not be possible by e-mail.
H.323
TCP
1720
NetMeeting uses this protocol.
HTTP
TCP
80
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/
server protocol for the world wide web.
HTTPS
TCP
443
HTTPS is a secured http session often used
in e-commerce.
ICMP
User-Defined
Internet Control Message Protocol is often
used for diagnostic purposes.
ICQ
UDP
4000
This is a popular Internet chat program.
IGMP (MULTICAST)
User-Defined
Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used
when sending packets to a specific group
of hosts.
IKE
UDP
500
The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is
used for key distribution and management.
IMAP4
TCP
143
The Internet Message Access Protocol is
used for e-mail.
IMAP4S
TCP
993
This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that
runs over SSL.
IRC
TCP/UDP
6667
This is another popular Internet chat
program.
MSN Messenger
TCP
1863
Microsoft Networks’ messenger service
uses this protocol.
NetBIOS
TCP/UDP
137
TCP/UDP
138
The Network Basic Input/Output System is
used for communication between
computers in a LAN.
TCP/UDP
139
TCP/UDP
445
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix E Services
Table 128 Examples of Services (continued)
NAME
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
NEW-ICQ
TCP
5190
An Internet chat program.
NEWS
TCP
144
A protocol for news groups.
NFS
UDP
2049
Network File System - NFS is a client/
server distributed file service that provides
transparent file sharing for network
environments.
NNTP
TCP
119
Network News Transport Protocol is the
delivery mechanism for the USENET news
group service.
PING
User-Defined
Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that
sends out ICMP echo requests to test
whether or not a remote host is reachable.
POP3
TCP
110
Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client
computer get e-mail from a POP3 server
through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or
other).
POP3S
TCP
995
This is a more secure version of POP3 that
runs over SSL.
PPTP
TCP
1723
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables
secure transfer of data over public
networks. This is the control channel.
PPTP_TUNNEL (GRE) User-Defined
47
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
enables secure transfer of data over public
networks. This is the data channel.
RCMD
TCP
512
Remote Command Service.
REAL_AUDIO
TCP
7070
A streaming audio service that enables real
time sound over the web.
REXEC
TCP
514
Remote Execution Daemon.
RLOGIN
TCP
513
Remote Login.
ROADRUNNER
TCP/UDP
1026
This is an ISP that provides services mainly
for cable modems.
RTELNET
TCP
107
Remote Telnet.
RTSP
TCP/UDP
554
The Real Time Streaming (media control)
Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for
multimedia on the Internet.
SFTP
TCP
115
The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old
way of transferring files between
computers.
SMTP
TCP
25
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the
message-exchange standard for the
Internet. SMTP enables you to move
messages from one e-mail server to
another.
SMTPS
TCP
465
This is a more secure version of SMTP that
runs over SSL.
SNMP
TCP/UDP
161
Simple Network Management Program.
SNMP-TRAPS
TCP/UDP
162
Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215).
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
335
Appendix E Services
Table 128 Examples of Services (continued)
336
NAME
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
SQL-NET
TCP
1521
Structured Query Language is an interface
to access data on many different types of
database systems, including mainframes,
midrange systems, UNIX systems and
network servers.
SSDP
UDP
1900
The Simple Service Discovery Protocol
supports Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP).
SSH
TCP/UDP
22
Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
STRM WORKS
UDP
1558
Stream Works Protocol.
SYSLOG
UDP
514
Syslog allows you to send system logs to a
UNIX server.
TACACS
UDP
49
Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal
Access Controller Access Control System).
TELNET
TCP
23
Telnet is the login and terminal emulation
protocol common on the Internet and in
UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/
IP networks. Its primary function is to
allow users to log into remote host
systems.
VDOLIVE
TCP
7000
UDP
userdefined
A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port
number is specified in the application.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Open Software Announcements
End-User License Agreement for “P-873HNUP-51B”
WARNING: ZyXEL Communications Corp. IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY
UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION
PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM. IF YOU DO
NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS, THEN ZyXEL IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU,
IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE
PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED OR ZyXEL, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED.
HOWEVER, CERTAIN ZYXEL’S PRODUCTS MAY CONTAIN–IN PART-SOME THIRD PARTY’S FREE AND
OPEN SOFTWARE PROGRAMS WHICH ALLOW YOU TO FREELY COPY, RUN, DISTRIBUTE, MODIFY
AND IMPROVE THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE TERMS OF SUCH THRID PARTY’S
LICENSES (“OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS”). THE OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS ARE LISTED IN
THE NOTICE OR APPENDIX BELOW. ZYXEL MAY HAVE DISTRIBUTED TO YOU HARDWARE AND/OR
SOFTWARE, OR MADE AVAILABLE FOR ELECTRONIC DOWNLOADS THESE FREE SOFTWARE
PROGRAMS OF THRID PARTIES AND YOU ARE LICENSED TO FREELY COPY, MODIFY AND
REDISTIBUTE THAT SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY.
NONE OF THE STATEMENTS OR DOCUMENTATION FROM ZYXEL INCLUDING ANY RESTRICTIONS OR
CONDITIONS STATED IN THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL RESTRICT ANY RIGHTS AND
LICENSES YOU MAY HAVE WITH RESPECT TO THE OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS UNDER THE
APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY.
1.Grant of License for Personal Use
ZyXEL Communications Corp. ("ZyXEL") grants you a non-exclusive, non-sublicense, nontransferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed (the "Software"),
including any documentation files accompanying the Software ("Documentation"), for internal
business use only, for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice. You have the
right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival, back-up or
disaster recovery purposes. You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder. Any
rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL, and all implied licenses are
disclaimed.
2.Ownership
You have no ownership rights in the Software. Rather, you have a license to use the Software as
long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect. Ownership of the Software,
Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL. Any
other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License
Agreement.
3.Copyright
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
337
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by international copyright law,
trade secret law, international treaty provisions, and the applicable national laws of each respective
country. All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL. You may not
remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or
Documentation.
4.Restrictions
You may not publish, display, disclose, sell, rent, lease, modify, store, loan, distribute, or create
derivative works of the Software, or any part thereof. You may not assign, sublicense, convey or
otherwise transfer, pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted
hereunder with respect to the Software. ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance,
technical or other support for the resultant modified Software. You may not copy, reverse engineer,
decompile, reverse compile, translate, adapt, or disassemble the Software, or any part thereof, nor
shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software. Except as and
only to the extent expressly permitted in this License, you may not market, co-brand, and private
label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software, or any part thereof. You may not use
the Software, or any part thereof, in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any
other person or entity. You may not cause, assist or permit any third party to do any of the
foregoing. Portions of the Software utilize or include third party software and other copyright
material. Acknowledgements, licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the
License Notice as below for the third party software, and your use of such material is exclusively
governed by their respective terms. ZyXEL has provided, as part of the Software package, access to
certain third party software as a convenience. To the extent that the Software contains third party
software, ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for
such software other than compliance with the applicable license terms of such third party, and
makes no warranty (express, implied or statutory) whatsoever with respect thereto. Please contact
the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly for technical support and customer
service related to its software and products.
5.Confidentiality
You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby
agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you
use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information. You agree to
reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons
employed by you who come into contact with the Software, and to use reasonable best efforts to
ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions, including, without limitation, not
knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving
the source code of the Software.
6.No Warranty
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS." TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, ZyXEL
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE
FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY
HAVE, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE, OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION,
OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED, OR THAT THE
SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION,
THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF
338
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
THIRTY (30) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE, AND NO WARRANTIES
SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD.
7.Limitation of Liability
IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE,
OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,
OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE OR PROGRAM, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY, EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. ZyXEL's TOTAL AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH
RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE
SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE,
BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCT’S PRICE. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
8.Export Restrictions
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS,
REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR
INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME. YOU
SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE
AND DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR
OTHER RESTRICTIONS. YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, LOSSES,
DAMAGES, LIABILITIES, COSTS AND EXPENSES, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS' FEES, TO
THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8.
9.Audit Rights
ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT, AT ITS OWN EXPENSE, UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE, TO
PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
10.Termination
This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated. You may terminate this License
Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and
Documentation in your possession or under your control. ZyXEL may terminate this License
Agreement for any reason, including, but not limited to, if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of
the terms of this License Agreement. Upon notification of termination, you agree to destroy or
return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all
known copies, including backup copies, have been destroyed. All provisions relating to
confidentiality, proprietary rights, and non-disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software
License Agreement.
11.General
This License Agreement shall be construed, interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of
China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof. The exclusive forum for any disputes
arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial
Arbitration Association sitting in ROC, Taiwan if the parties agree to a binding arbitration. This
License Agreement shall constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto. This License
Agreement, the rights granted hereunder, the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned
by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL. Any waiver or modification of this License
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
339
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto. If any part of
this License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the
remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of
the parties.
NOTE: Some components of this product incorporate free software programs covered under the
open source code licenses which allows you to freely copy, modify and redistribute the software. For
at least three (3) years from the date of distribution of the applicable product or software, we will
give to anyone who contacts us at the ZyXEL Technical Support (support@zyxel.com.tw), for a
charge of no more than our cost of physically performing source code distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the complete corresponding source code for the version of the Programs
that we distributed to you if we are in possession of such.
Notice
Information herein is subject to change without notice. Companies, names, and data used in
examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted. No part may be reproduced or transmitted in
any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, except the express written
permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
This Product includes MIPS Linux kernel , Bridge-Utils, BusyBox 1.0.0 toolset , Dproxy, ebtables,
bftpd, iproute2, iptables, udhcp and zebra software under GPL 2.0 license.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but
changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License
340
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose
authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU
Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software
(and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it,
that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you
can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or
to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if
you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of
such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you
have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show
them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each
author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no
warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want
its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by
others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger
that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for
everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The
"Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means
either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each
licensee is addressed as "you". Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted,
and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends
on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in
any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this
License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of
this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a
copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
341
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work
based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files
and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is
derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it,
when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or
else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these
conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself
is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program
is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are
not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works
in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute
them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a
work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License,
whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part
regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your
rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation
of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program)
on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of
this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code
or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the
following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a
charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machinereadable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1
and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the
information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or
executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work
means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work,
complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
interface definition files, plus the
scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special
exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in
either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
342
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a
designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place
counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided
under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have
received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so
long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else
grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so,
and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based
on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program
subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the
recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance
by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from
the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may
not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free
redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution
of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended
to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the
sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the
wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through
any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make
thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or
by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that
distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public
License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but
may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing
version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
343
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version
or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify
a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted
by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make
exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all
derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED
IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM
TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
All other trademarks or trade names mentioned herein, if any, are the property of their respective
owners.
This Product includes ppp software under below license
This directory contains source code and precompiled binaries for ppp-2.4, a package which
implements the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) to provide Internet connections over serial lines. ppp2.4 currently supports Linux and Solaris.
All of the code here can be freely used and redistributed. Theindividual source files each have their
own copyright and permission
notice; some have a BSD-style notice and some are under the GPL.
This Product includes Ssh server: dropbear software under MIT-style license
344
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
The MIT License
Copyright (c)  
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal
in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
This Product includes openssl: openSSL library software under BSD-style license
Copyright (c) , 
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the  nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
345
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
346
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2011 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed,
stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or
software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent
rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein
without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Trademarks
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications,
Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and
may be properties of their respective owners.
Certifications
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement
The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operations.
This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
347
Appendix G Legal Information
If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be
determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
• This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
• IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1
through 11.
• To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20
am
cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons.
ࣹრ!"
ࠉᖕ!!‫פ܅‬෷ሽंᘿ୴ࢤሽᖲጥ෻ᙄऄ
รԼԲය!!ᆖী‫ڤ‬ᎁᢞ‫ٽ‬௑հ‫פ܅‬෷୴᙮ሽᖲΔॺᆖ๺‫ױ‬Δֆ‫׹‬Ε೸ᇆࢨࠌ‫ش‬
ृ݁լ൓ᖐ۞᧢‫ޓ‬᙮෷Ε‫ף‬Օ‫פ‬෷ࢨ᧢‫଺ޓ‬๻ૠհ௽ࢤ֗‫פ‬౨Ζ
รԼ؄ය!!‫פ܅‬෷୴᙮ሽᖲհࠌ‫ش‬լ൓ᐙ᥼ଆ౰‫ڜ‬٤֗եឫ‫ٽ‬ऄຏॾΙᆖ࿇෼
‫ڶ‬եឫ෼ွழΔᚨ‫ܛم‬ೖ‫ش‬Δࠀ‫ޏ‬࿳۟ྤեឫழֱ൓ᤉᥛࠌ‫ش‬Ζ
ছႈ‫ٽ‬ऄຏॾΔਐࠉሽॾ๵ࡳ‫܂‬ᄐհྤᒵሽॾΖ‫פ܅‬෷୴᙮ሽᖲႊ‫ݴ‬
࠹‫ٽ‬ऄຏॾࢨՠᄐΕઝᖂ֗᠔᛭‫ش‬ሽंᘿ୴ࢤሽᖲ๻ໂհեឫΖ!
‫ء‬ᖲૻ‫ڇ‬լեឫ‫ٽ‬ऄሽፕፖլ࠹๯եឫঅᎽයٙՀ࣍৛փࠌ‫ش‬Ζ!
྇֟ሽ጖ंᐙ᥼Δᓮ‫ݔ‬ᔞࠌ‫ش‬Ζ!
Notices
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
This device is designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz and/or 5 GHz networks throughout the EC region and
Switzerland, with restrictions in France.
348
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Appendix G Legal Information
Ce produit est conçu pour les bandes de fréquences 2,4 GHz et/ou 5 GHz conformément à la
législation Européenne. En France métropolitaine, suivant les décisions n°03-908 et 03-909 de
l’ARCEP, la puissance d’émission ne devra pas dépasser 10 mW (10 dB) dans le cadre d’une
installation WiFi en extérieur pour les fréquences comprises entre 2454 MHz et 2483,5 MHz.
Viewing Certifications
Go to http://www.zyxel.com.
Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page.
Select the certification you wish to view from this page.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in
materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the
warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to
faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective
products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall
deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any
replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or
higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the
product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to
abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser.
This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of
merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for
indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact ZyXEL's Service Center for your Return Material
Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is recommended that
the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with
an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of ZyXEL) and the customer
will be billed for parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the
corresponding return address, Postage Paid. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you
may also have other rights that vary from country to country.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at
www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
349
Appendix G Legal Information
350
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Index
Index
ACL rule 201
CA 211, 325
ACS 245
Canonical Format Indicator See CFI
activation
firewalls 197
SIP ALG 168
SSID 96
CBR 85
CCMs 262
Address Resolution Protocol 225
certificate
details 217
factory default 212
ADSL
compliance 275
Certificate Authority
See CA.
alternative subnet mask notation 304
applications
Internet access 22
certificates 211
authentication 211
CA
creating 213
importing 215
public key 211
replacing 212
storage space 212
applications, NAT 172
Certification Authority 211
ARP Table 225
Certification Authority. see CA
ATM
QoS 84
certifications 347
notices 348
viewing 349
antenna 273
directional 331
gain 330
omni-directional 331
AP (access point) 321
authentication 103, 104
RADIUS server 104
Auto Configuration Server, see ACS 245
backup
configuration 259
CFI 86
CFM 262
CCMs 262
link trace test 262
loopback test 262
MA 262
MD 262
MEP 262
MIP 262
Basic Service Set, see BSS
channel 321
interference 321
blinking LEDs 25
channel, wireless LAN 102
broadcast 72
client list 119
BSS 106, 319
example 106
compliance 275
Basic Service Set, See BSS 319
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
configuration
backup 259
firewalls 197
351
Index
reset 261
restoring 260
static route 137, 177, 242
Connectivity Check Messages, see CCMs
copyright 347
CoS 154
CoS technologies 140
EAP Authentication 325
ECHO 172
e-mail
log example 255
CTS (Clear to Send) 322
encapsulation 71
PPPoA 82
PPPoE 82
CTS threshold 100, 103
encryption 105, 327
creating certificates 213
ESS 320
Extended Service Set IDentification 90, 97
Extended Service Set, See ESS 320
data fragment threshold 100, 103
DDoS 196
default server address 168
Denials of Service, see DoS
FCC interference statement 347
DHCP 116, 132
DHCP relay 274
filters
MAC address 97, 104
DHCP server 274
Finger 172
Differentiated Services, see DiffServ 154
firewalls 195
add protocols 197
configuration 197
DDoS 196
DoS 196
LAND attack 196
Ping of Death 196
SYN attack 195
DiffServ 154
marking rule 154
digital IDs 211
disclaimer 347
DMZ 167
DNS 116, 133
Domain Name System, see DNS
firmware 257
version 67
DoS 196
forwarding ports 160
DS field 154
fragmentation threshold 100, 103, 322
DS, dee differentiated services
FTP 160, 172
Domain Name 172
DSCP 154
DSL bonding 80
dynamic DNS 176
wildcard 176
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP
General wireless LAN screen 88
dynamic WEP key exchange 326
DYNDNS wildcard 176
hidden node 321
352
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Index
HTTP 172
humidity 273
IANA 308
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
see IANA
IBSS 319
IEEE 802.11g 323
IEEE 802.1Q 85
IGA 170
IGMP 72
Access Control List 186
ACL 186
filter 182
multicast group list 235
router alert option 180
statistics 236
LAN 115
client list 119
DHCP 116, 132
DNS 116, 133
IP address 116, 117, 133
MAC address 120
status 67
subnet mask 116, 117, 133
LAN VLAN 131
LAND attack 196
LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration 247
LBR 262
limitations
wireless LAN 105
WPS 112
link trace 262
Link Trace Message, see LTM
Link Trace Response, see LTR
IGMP proxy 276
Local Area Network, see LAN
IGMP snooping 179
IGMP v1 276
login 29
passwords 29
IGMP v2 276
logs 227, 231, 235, 253
ILA 170
Loop Back Response, see LBR
importing certificates 215
loopback 262
Independent Basic Service Set
See IBSS 319
LTM 262
LTR 262
initialization vector (IV) 327
Inside Global Address, see IGA
Inside Local Address, see ILA
interface group 189
Internet
wizard setup 37
MA 262
MAC address 98, 120
filter 97, 104
Internet access 22
wizard setup 37
MAC authentication 97
Internet Group Multicast Protocol, see IGMP
Mac filter 203
IP address 72, 83, 116, 133
ping 263
private 134
Maintenance Association, see MA
IP alias
NAT applications 172
IP multicasting 276
Maintenance Domain, see MD
Maintenance End Point, see MEP
Management Information Base (MIB) 248
managing the device
good habits 22
MBS 84
MBSSID 106
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
353
Index
MD 262
MEP 262
MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 85
Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 327, 329
multicast 72
IGMP 72
passwords 29
Multiple BSS, see MBSSID
PCR 84
multiplexing 83
LLC-based 83
VC-based 83
Per-Hop Behavior, see PHB 154
PBC 107
PHB 154
PIN, WPS 108
example 109
Ping of Death 196
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 172
POP3 172
NAT 159, 161, 169, 170, 308
applications 172
IP alias 172
example 171
global 170
IGA 170
ILA 170
inside 170
local 170
outside 170
port forwarding 160
port number 172
services 172
SIP ALG 168
activation 168
port forwarding 160
NAT example 173
product registration 349
Network Address Translation
see NAT
PSK 327
Network Address Translation, see NAT
Push Button Configuration, see PBC
Network Map 65
push button, WPS 107
ports 25
power adaptor 276
power specifications 273
PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) Link Layer
Protocol 276
PPPoA 82
PPPoE 82
PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) 275
PPTP 172
preamble 101, 103
preamble mode 107
private IP address 134
push button 27
network map 33
NNTP 172
operation humidity 273
operation temperature 273
QoS 139, 154
marking 140
setup 139
tagging 140
versus CoS 140
Quality of Service, see QoS
354
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Index
activation 168
SMTP 172
RADIUS 324
message types 324
messages 324
shared secret key 325
RADIUS server 104
registration
product 349
related documentation 3
remote management
TR-069 245
Remote Procedure Calls, see RPCs 245
reset 26, 261
restart 261
restoring configuration 260
RFC 2516 275
RFC 3164 227
SNMP 172, 247, 248, 276
agents 248
Get 248
GetNext 248
Manager 248
managers 248
MIB 248
Set 248
Trap 248
versions 247
SNMP trap 172
SPI 196
srTCM 156
SSID 104
activation 96
MBSSID 106
router features 22
static route 135
configuration 137, 177, 242
example 135
RPPCs 245
static VLAN
RTS (Request To Send) 322
threshold 321, 322
status 65, 68
firmware version 67
LAN 67
WAN 67
wireless LAN 68
router alert option 180
RTS threshold 100, 103
status indicators 25
STB Vendor ID 129
storage humidity 273
safety warnings 5
SCR 84
security
wireless LAN 103
Security Log 229
Security Parameter Index, see SPI
service access control 223
Service Set 90, 97
Services 172
setup
firewalls 197
static route 137, 177, 242
shaping traffic 84
Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP
Single Rate Three Color Marker, see srTCM
SIP ALG 168
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
storage temperature 273
subnet 301
subnet mask 116, 133, 302
subnetting 304
SYN attack 195
syntax conventions 3
syslog
protocol 227
severity levels 227
system
firmware 257
version 67
passwords 29
reset 26
status 65
LAN 67
WAN 67
355
Index
wireless LAN 68
time 251
VBR-RT 85
VCI 83
VDSL 275
VID
Tag Control Information See TCI
Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID
TCI
temperature 273
thresholds
data fragment 100, 103
RTS/CTS 100, 103
time 251
Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN
VLAN 85
Introduction 85
number of possible VIDs
priority frame
static
VLAN ID 85
VLAN Identifier See VID
VLAN tag 85
VPI 83
TPID 85
TR-064 247
TR-069 245
ACS setup 245
authentication 246
trademarks 347
traffic shaping 84
example 84
transparent bridging 276
trTCM 156
Two Rate Three Color Marker, see trTCM
UBR 85
unicast 72
Universal Plug and Play, see UPnP
upgrading firmware 257
UPnP 121
cautions 117
example 121
installation 121
NAT traversal 116
WAN 71
ATM QoS 84
encapsulation 71
IGMP 72
IP address 72, 83
multicast 72
multiplexing 83
status 67
traffic shaping 84
example 84
VCI 83
VPI 83
warranty 349
note 349
web configurator 29
login 29
passwords 29
WEP 105
WEP Encryption 92, 93
WEP encryption 91
WEP key 91
Wide Area Network, see WAN
Wi-Fi Protected Access 327
VBR 85
VBR-nRT 85
356
wireless client WPA supplicants 328
wireless LAN 87, 101
authentication 103, 104
BSS 106
example 106
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Index
channel 102
encryption 105
example 102
fragmentation threshold 100, 103
limitations 105
MAC address filter 97, 104
MBSSID 106
preamble 101, 103
RADIUS server 104
RTS/CTS threshold 100, 103
security 103
SSID 104
activation 96
status 68
WEP 105
WPA 105
WPA-PSK 105
WPS 107, 109
example 110
limitations 112
PIN 108
push button 27, 107
limitations 112
PIN 108
example 109
push button 27, 107
wireless security 323
Wireless tutorial 46
wizard setup
Internet 37
WLAN
interference 321
security parameters 330
WPA 105, 327
key caching 328
pre-authentication 328
user authentication 328
vs WPA-PSK 327
wireless client supplicant 328
with RADIUS application example 328
WPA2 327
user authentication 328
vs WPA2-PSK 327
wireless client supplicant 328
with RADIUS application example 328
WPA2-Pre-Shared Key 327
WPA2-PSK 327
application example 329
WPA-PSK 105, 327
application example 329
WPS 107, 109
example 110
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
357
Index
358
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
Index
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide
359
Index
360
P-873HNUP-51B User’s Guide

Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 9.0
Modify Date                     : 2011:05:31 10:04:45+08:00
Create Date                     : 2011:05:31 09:58:18+08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2011:05:31 10:04:45+08:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : P-873HNUP-51B_User Manual.pdf
Creator                         : cathyc
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.0.0 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:0c31e5c7-4a54-4104-a2d4-8af213ef67d4
Instance ID                     : uuid:8f0492e3-d6d9-4fa8-90ff-d142f63ea60f
Page Count                      : 360
Author                          : cathyc


EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

FCC ID Filing: I88P873HNUP51B


								

							
		
		

			
Navigation menu